Imc0033metd - Sra4 4.8!6!13 GHZ - Training Manual

s
SRA 4
6-13 GHz (WB ODU)
Rel. 4.8
SDH Split Radio
TRAINING DOCUMENTATION
IMC 0033METD6-13
Issue 3, September 2006
Copyright (C) Siemens S.p.A. 2006

V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10
I-20126 Milano
Issued by Customer Documentation Department

S.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158
I-20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI
DISCLAIMER
Siemens may have patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights relevant to the subject matters
present in this document.
If not explicitly defined by a license agreement written by Siemens, the ownership of this document does not give any use license for the above
mentioned patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual properties.
For your convenience, Siemens may make this document available.
The entire risk deriving from the use, or the results of the use, of this document are at users charge.
The information contained in this document is subjected to changes without notice.
Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed previously in a written contract.
Siemens gives no assurance relevant to the accuracy of the results or of the output deriving from such information.
In case of utilization of the information transferred by means of this document, we advise You to verify if the export licenses, required by the
laws, have been granted or if there are not any other impediments arising from the laws in course in Italy, Germany or relevant to the export.
index
SDH Split Radio (WB ODU)
Safety Rules
Glossary
Concepts and Characteristics in SDH

Technology
Introduction
General Description
System Configuration
System Protection
Functional Description
Installation
SRA 4 6-13 GHz - Rel. 4.8
IMC 0033METD6-13
Activation & Maintenance
10
11
12
13
14
15
Siemens
Status of Manual
STATUS OF MANUAL
Current:
Previous:
Issue 2, August 2006
1 Chp. 1
Safety Rules
2 Chp. 2
Glossary
3 Chp. 3
Concepts and Characteristics in SDH Issue 3, September 2006

Technology
4 Chp. 4
Introduction
5 Chp. 5
General Description
6 Chp. 6
7 Chp. 7
System Protection
8 Chp. 8
9 Chp. 9
Installation
10 Chp. 10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Siemens
Warnhinweise
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangslufig bestimmte Teile der Gerte unter Spannung. Einige Teile knnen
auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnhinweise kann zu Krperverletzung und Sachschden fhren.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert und wartet.
Beachten sie bitte die ntigen Sicherheitsanforderungen und leisten Sie durch ein problembewutes Verhalten
Ihren Beitrag zur Verhtung von Unfllen jeder Art. Gefahren fr Leib und Leben / Leben und Gesundheit bzw.
Verletzungen, die aus sicherheitswidrigem Verhalten resultieren knnen, sind von einer Haftung durch das
Training Institute ausgeschlossen.
Warnings
High Voltages are present in certain parts of this equipment. Some parts can also have high operating
temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in equipment
damage.
Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
Please ensure the necessary safety requirements are met and, by demonstrating a responsible attitude, play your
part in avoiding accidents of any kind. Danger to life and limb, life and well being or injuries that could result from
actions adverse to safety are excluded from any liability on the part of the Training Institute.
Atencin
Algunos elementos de este equipo presentan tensiones altas. Incluso algunos componentes pueden presentar
alta temperatura.
No observar estas condiciones y las instrucciones de seguridad puede causar daos personales, as como daos
al equipo.
Por lo tanto el sistema debe ser instalado y mantenido por personal cualificado.
Tenga presente los requerimientos de seguridad y contribuya a la prevencin de accidentes de toda ndole,
actuando consciente de los problemas que pudieran surgir. El Training Institute' no se responsabiliza por daos
y perjuicios resultantes de actuaciones contrarias a los aspectos de seguridad y que pongan en peligro la salud
y la vida de las personas involucradas.
Attention
Des tensions leves sont invitablement prsentes des points spcifiques de cet quipement lectrique.
Certains lments peuvent aussi avoir en service des temprature leves.
La non-observation de ces conditions et des instructions de scurit peut engendrer des dgats personnelles ou
un endommagement du matriel.
Pour ces raisons seulement le personnel form et qualifi est permis dinstaller et de maintenir le systme.
Veuillez tenir compte des exigences de scurit ncessaires et contribuer la prvention des accidents de toutes
sortes par un comportement conscient des risques. Le Training Institute dcline toute responsabilit pour les
dangers menaant le corps et la vie / la vie et la sant et/ou les blessures pouvant rsulter d'actes contraires la
scurit.
VI
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Siemens
Attenzione
In certe parti dellapparato sono presenti alte tensioni. In servizio, certi componenti possono raggiungere
temperature elevate.
La non osservanza di queste condizioni e delle istruzioni di sicurezza pu provocare incidenti alle persone o danni
allapparato.
Per questo linstallazione e la manutenzione del sistema deve essere affidata solo a personale qualificato e
preparato.
Assicurarsi che i requisiti di sicurezza siano soddisfatti e contribuire alla prevenzione di incidenti di qualsiasi tipo
tenendo sempre in considerazione i rischi presenti.
Il Training Institute declina ogni responsabilit relativa a danni alla salute e alla vita del personale conseguenza
di azioni ed interventi che non rispettano le procedure di sicurezza.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
VII
Siemens
VIII
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
INDEX
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4
4.1
Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
1.2.1
Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
1.2.2
Warnings for the optical safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1
1.2.3
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2
1.2.3.1 Warnings for the electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2
1.2.4
Waste equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3
1.2.5
External operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4
ESDS Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.1
List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Concepts and Characteristics in SDH Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
SDH Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
3.2.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.1
3.2.2
Objectives of the synchronous digital hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.2
3.2.3
Digital structure of SDH signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3
3.2.4
STM-1 frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3
3.2.5
Administrative unit AU-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.4
3.2.6
STM-RR frame structure (Sub STM-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5
3.2.7
AU-3 Administrative unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5
3.2.8
Tributary units and their structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6
3.2.9
TU-3 Tributary Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.7
3.2.10 Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8
3.2.11 Loading a 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal in the VC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8
3.2.12 Loading a 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal in the VC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9
SDH transmission network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
3.3.1
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10
3.3.2
Multiplex section and regenerator section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
4.1.1
RF channeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.2
4.1.2
System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4
4.1.3
Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.5
4.1.4
Modulation types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.5
4.1.5
System building blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6
4.1.5.1 Indoor section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.6
4.1.6
Outdoor section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8
4.1.7
IDU-ODU interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
4.1.7.1 Radio signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
4.1.7.2 IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Siemens
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
6
6.1
4.1.7.3 ODU power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10

4.1.8
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
4.1.9
System power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
4.1.10 Facility & services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
4.1.10.1 Equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Technical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.1.1
Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.1.1.1 General Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
5.1.1.2 IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
5.1.1.3 Transmitter Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
5.1.1.4 Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
5.1.1.5 Receiver Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
5.1.1.6 ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
5.1.1.7 Modemodulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
5.1.1.8 Digital Service Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
5.1.1.9 Baseband Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
5.1.1.10 1+1 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
5.1.1.11 External alarms electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
5.1.1.12 System Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
5.1.1.13 Power Consumption (from 48 V battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
5.1.2
Loop-backs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
5.2.1
Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
RF Channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
5.3.1
6L GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
5.3.2
6U GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
5.3.3
7 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
5.3.4
8 GHz channelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
5.3.5
10 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
5.3.6
11 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
5.3.7
13 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
6.1.1
Indoor assembly composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.1.2
Outdoor assembly composition (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.1.3
IDU/ODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.1.4
ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.1.4.1 2+0 CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
6.1.4.2 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.1.4.3 2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.1.4.4 2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.1.5
Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
6.1.5.1 1+0 Supporting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
6.1.5.2 1+1 Supporting frames for Hot Stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4

6.1.5.3 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
(6U/6L, 7 and 8 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5
6.1.5.4 Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
(10, 11 and 13 GHz). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5
6.1.5.5 Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6
6.1.5.6 Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . .6.6
7
System Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.1
7.1 1+1 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
7.1.1
N+1 protection (with SRA 4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.3
8
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1
8.1 ODU Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
8.1.1
Main characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.1
8.1.1.1 Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.2
8.1.1.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.2
8.2 IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
8.2.1
Controller unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5
8.2.2
Alarm Restitution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5
8.2.3
Fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5
8.2.4
BB-MODEM unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.5
8.2.4.1 BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.6
8.2.4.2 Modem Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7
8.3 LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.1 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (for SRA4 IDU only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
9.1.1
2+0 CC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.1.2
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.1.3
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.1.4
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.1.5
N+1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.1
9.2 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
9.2.1
SRA 4 IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2
9.2.1.1 Primary supply voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2
9.2.1.2 Connector functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.2
9.2.2
SRA IDU-STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3
9.2.2.1 Primary supply voltage connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3
9.2.3
CONNECTOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.3
9.3 IDU/ODU connection with Braided or 1/4 Coaxial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
10
Activation & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
10.1 PRESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
10.1.1 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
10.1.2 System E2PROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
10.2 ACTIVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
10.2.1 Local checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.1
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Siemens
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.2.2 IDU first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2

10.2.3 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
10.2.4 Checks on equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
10.2.4.1 List of checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
10.2.4.2 Control of the system configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
10.2.4.3 Configuration of IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
10.2.4.4 Received and Transmitted Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
10.2.4.5 Switching test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
10.2.4.6 Background BER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
10.2.4.7 Final checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
10.2.4.8 Restoring of the operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
10.3.1 List and use of accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
10.4.1 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
10.4.1.1 Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
TROUBLESHOOTING AND RESTORING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
10.5.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
10.5.1.1 Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
10.5.1.2 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
10.5.1.3 IDU-ODU cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
10.5.1.4 IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
LIST OF SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
10.6.1 IDU spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
10.6.1.1 AP ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
10.6.1.2 AP/CC ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
Fig. 3.4
Fig. 3.5
Fig. 3.6
Fig. 3.7
Fig. 3.8
Fig. 3.9
Fig. 3.10
Fig. 3.11
Fig. 3.12
Fig. 3.13
Fig. 4.1
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.3
Fig. 4.4
Fig. 4.5
Fig. 4.6
Fig. 4.7
Fig. 4.8
Fig. 4.9
Fig. 4.10
Fig. 4.11
Fig. 4.12
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
Fig. 6.3
Fig. 6.4
Fig. 6.5
Fig. 6.6
Fig. 6.7
Fig. 6.8
Fig. 6.9
Fig. 6.10
SDH multiplex structure (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12

STM-1 frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Details of section bytes inside the OH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Composition of the AU-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Composition of the AU-4 and C-4 structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Fluctuations of the VC-4 inside the payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
STM-RR frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Composition of the TU structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Composition of structures C-3, VC-3 and TU-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Loading a 140 Mbit/s signal into a VC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Loading a 34 Mbit/s signal into a VC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22
Example of an SDH network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Examples for the multiplex and regenerator section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
SRA 4 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA 4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
IDU in N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA 4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling). . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23
Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.24
SOH Bytes Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25
Equipment Management Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26
Loop-back 1 (Trib.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
1+0 system with independent antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
1+1 system with Hot Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
2+0 system with dual polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
1+1 system copolar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration
(with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration
(with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration . . . . . . 6.14
N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Siemens
Fig. 6.11
Fig. 6.12
Fig. 6.13
Fig. 6.14
Fig. 6.15
Fig. 6.16
Fig. 6.17
Fig. 6.18
Fig. 6.19
Fig. 6.20
Fig. 6.21
Fig. 6.22
Fig. 6.23
Fig. 6.24
Fig. 6.25
Fig. 6.26
Fig. 6.27
Fig. 6.28
Fig. 6.29
Fig. 6.30
Fig. 6.31
Fig. 6.32
Fig. 6.33
Fig. 6.34
Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.2
Fig. 7.3
Fig. 7.4
Fig. 7.5
Fig. 8.1
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.3
Fig. 8.4
Fig. 8.5
Fig. 8.6
SRA 4
1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

N+1 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2x(1+1) HOT-STANDBY CC Indoor assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor assembly (AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor assembly (AP/CC ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODUs for CC configuration . . . . .
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration
(2x(1+1) FD with one antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration ( 2x(1+1) FD
with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1)
Hot Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+0 Supporting frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 Supporting frame for Hot Standby (Balanced frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 Supporting frame for Hot Standby (Unbalanced frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) . . . . . .
Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration
(with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(with two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration . . . . .
1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection
(with SRA 4 IDU and SRA 4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection
(with SRA4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1
system type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outdoor unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MWTF simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDU Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XPIC Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
6.24
6.25
6.26
6.27
6.28
6.29
6.30
6.31
6.32
6.33
6.34
6.35
6.36
6.37
6.38
6.39
6.40
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 8.7
Fig. 8.8
Fig. 8.9
Fig. 8.10
Fig. 8.11
Fig. 8.12
Fig. 8.13
Fig. 8.14
Fig. 9.1
Fig. 9.2
Fig. 9.3
Fig. 9.4
Fig. 9.5
Fig. 9.6
Fig. 9.7
Fig. 9.8
Fig. 9.9
Fig. 9.10
Fig. 9.11
Fig. 9.12
Fig. 9.13
Fig. 9.14
Fig. 9.15
Fig. 9.16
Fig. 9.17
Fig. 9.18
Fig. 9.19
Fig. 9.20
Fig. 9.21
Fig. 9.22
Fig. 9.23
Fig. 9.24
Fig. 9.25
Fig. 9.26
Fig. 10.1
Siemens
Front panel of the IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . 8.17
Front panel of the IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . 8.18
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced
BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced
BB-MODEM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20
LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21
LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection
(with SRA 4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.22
LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.23
LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection
(with SRA 4 IDU only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24
IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs
(2x(1+1) FD with one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with
one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with
two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with
two antennas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
IDU assembly with CC configuration connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby) . . . . . 9.13
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with
one antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17
155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
Alarm Connector (IDU assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.24
155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.25
Alarm Connector (IDU assembly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
64 kbit/s service channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30
Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.31
IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.2
Fig. 10.3
ODU connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . .

LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system
(SRA 4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.4 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system
(SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.5 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system
(SRA 4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.6 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration
(SRA 4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.7 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA 4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.8 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.9 LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA 4 IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.10 Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure. . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10.11 Alarm Restitution unit replacement management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.14
10.15
10.16
10.17
10.18
10.19
10.20
10.21
10.22
10.23
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
LIST OF TABLES
Tab. 4.1
Tab. 4.2
Tab. 4.3
Tab. 4.4
Tab. 4.5
Tab. 4.6
Tab. 4.7
Tab. 4.8
Tab. 5.1
Tab. 5.2
Tab. 5.3
Tab. 5.4
Tab. 5.5
Tab. 5.6
Tab. 5.7
Tab. 5.8
Tab. 5.9
Tab. 5.10
Tab. 5.11
Tab. 5.12
Tab. 5.13
Tab. 5.14
Tab. 5.15
Tab. 5.16
Tab. 5.17
Tab. 5.18
Tab. 5.19
Tab. 5.20
Tab. 5.21
Tab. 5.22
RF 6 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2

RF 10 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
Base System Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Section OverHead bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Short cable/Long cable setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Max output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
RF transmitted spectrum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Modulation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
Typical Hitless switch thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with 10% tolerance. . . . . 5.8
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 1) . . . . . 5.11
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED
(1 digit cod. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 3) . . . . 5.12
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED
(1 digit cod. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3
(1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
(1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3). . . . . . 5.14
(1st digit ext. P/N = 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN
(1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED
(1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4
(1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
(1st digit ext. P/N = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main
(1st digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Siemens
SRA 4
Tab. 5.23 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1

Interleaved/Annex 1 (1st digit ext. P/N = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
Tab. 5.24 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06
Recommends 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
Tab. 5.25 13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved)
(1 digit ext. P/N = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
Tab. 6.1
System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Tab. 6.2
SRA equipment composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Tab. 7.1
Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Tab. 7.2
Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Tab. 7.3
Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Tab. 8.1
Summary of the front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10
Tab. 10.1 KEY alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
Tab. 10.2 Station accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
Tab. 10.3 List of spare parts - IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Tab. 10.4 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Tab. 10.5 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
Tab. 10.6 10 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Tab. 10.7 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Tab. 10.8 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Tab. 10.9 6 GHz (6L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Tab. 10.10 6 GHz (6U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Tab. 10.11 7 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Tab. 10.12 8 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
Tab. 10.13 11 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
Tab. 10.14 13 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12
10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Safety Rules
1.1
General
This document contents all the safety rules and the use precautions to be followed during operations on the equipment to avoid injuries to personnel and/or damages to the equipment components.
1.2
Safety rules
The equipment complies with the 1999/5/EC European specification.

The equipment is prearranged for supplying from station batteries (-48 to -60 VDC 20%); then
follow the on force specifications for low voltage supplied equipment's.
1.2.1
Optical safety
On the equipment, there are the following plates:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1
1.2.2
Warnings for the optical safety
The optical source used into the subject equipment has been classified by the
manufacturer as 1 class laser according to EN 60825-1/IEC 60825-1.
This class of laser is: "Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions of operation, including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing."
The following rules must be followed:
Do not point to the eyes a broken fiber or an incomplete one or an optical connector not
covered.
If the optical source is not surely switched off, do not directly or for reflection stare (particularly using lenses or by means of a microscope) at a broken fiber or at an incomplete
one or at an optical connector not covered.
Handle carefully the optical fiber. A broken optical fiber can cause damages to eyes and
skin.
IMC 0026METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
1-1
SRA 4
Siemens
Check that the optical source is switched off before execute or interrupt an optical connection.
Do not connect a fiber to an optical output without checking that the fiber terminal is ended.
Do not supply the optical tributary out of the sub-rack and do not change the factory settings and adjustments.
1.2.3
Electrical safety
1.2.3.1
Warnings for the electrical safety
The equipment complies with the EN 60950-1 safety specifications.

The equipment must be installed, started up, managed and repaired only by properly
trained personnel.
1-2
Before supplying the equipment, it is necessary to complete the wiring of the connections
to the protection ground, the insertion of all the units and/or modules provided for the requested configuration and also the connection of all the necessary connectors.
The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged.
IMC 0026METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
1.2.4
Waste equipment management
The radio equipment at the end of its life can be classified as 16 02 14 equipment out of use
different from the equipment listed in 16 02 09 to 16 02 13 according to the dangerous waste list determined in article 1 para. 4 of Government Recc. 91/689/EEC on the dangerous waste
updated in Recc. 2001/118/EC.
INFORMATION TO USER (FOR ITALIAN MARKET ONLY)

According to the art. 13 of the legislative decree, D.Lgs nr. 151 of the 25th of july
2005. "adopting directives 2002/95/CE, 2002/96/CE e 2003/108/CE, releted on
the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment, and on disposal of electrical and electronic waste".
The crossed-out bin symbol on equipment, means that the product, at the end of its
useful life, must be disposed separately from the municipal waste. User should return
it to the municipalities collection system or to the ratailers if you buy a new equivalent
product.
Differentiated waste of old appliances will result in recycling, treatment and environmental compatible disposal, which will help to prevent potential negative consequences on the environment and human health and consequently the reuse of renewable raw material
The misdemenour of the disposal will lead to financial penalties as defined in artt. 50
onwards, of the legislative decree nr. 22 of the 5th of february 1997.
The equipment does not include:
Cadmium
Mercury
Asbestos
Radioactive materials
PCB
Berillium.
IMC 0026METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
1-3
SRA 4
Siemens
1.2.5
External operations
Some other operations involving danger conditions are the ones executed outside during the
equipment installation and starting up phase.
During the execution of such operations, it is necessary to follow strictly the safety rules listed
here below:
During installation, while the antenna and/or the external supporting-frame for rod are lifted, it is strictly forbidden to stay or to pass in the underlying area. Such an area must be
properly restricted or signalled according to the on force rules.
For the external operations to be executed on the antenna, on the frame and on the ODU,
all the necessary safety rules against accidental fallings of the operators must be respected, according to the on force rules. For example, it is necessary to use protection fences
and belts.
During the equipment starting up phase, the operators must not be in front of the antenna.
If one of the above mentioned safety rules is not respected, some injuries to the
personnel can be caused.
1-4
IMC 0026METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
1.3
Siemens
ESDS Precautions
The ESDS (Electro Static Discharge Sensitive) electronic devices can be partially or permanently damaged by the static electricity that is commonly present in the operating environment.
The main ESDS devices are:
CMOS components
Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology
SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components
Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs
MOS/FET components and arrays
Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHz
Modules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels:
In order avoid any damage while handling the modules, the user should wear an antistatic elastic bracelet, grounded by means a spiral cord.
Those modules that are mounted on the equipment (faulty or spare parts) shall be stores in
their original antistatic package marked by the labels above shown.
IMC 0026METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
1-5
Siemens
1-6
SRA 4
IMC 0026METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Glossary
2.1
List of abbreviations
ADC
Analog to Digital Converter
ADM
Add/Drop Multiplex
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
AP
Alternate Polarization
ASIC
Application Specific Integrate Circuit
ATDE
Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU
Administrative Unit
AUOH
Administrative Unit Overhead
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
2-1
Siemens
SRA 4
AUG
Administrative Unit Group
AU-PTR
Administrative Unit Pointer
BB
Base Band
BCM
Block Coded Modulation
BER
Bit Error Ratio
BIP
Bit Interleaved Parity
B-ISDN
Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network
CC
Co-Channel
CCIR
Comit Consultatif International des Radiocomunications
CCITT
Comit Consultatif International Telgraphique et Tlphonique
CTR
Complesso Trasmettitore Ricevitore (Transceiver equipment)
DAC
Digital to Analog Converter
DCC
Data Communications Channel
DCCR
Data Communications Channel (Repeater section)
2-2
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
DCCM
Data Communications Channel (Multiplexer section)
DCN
Data Communication Network
DFM
Diversive Fade Margin
DLC
Digital Loop Carrier
DLS
Data Link Service
DRF
Dielectric Resonator Filter
DRO
Dielectric Resonator Oscillator
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTI
Double Tributary Interface
DXC
Digital cross-connect
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
EOC
Embedded Operations Channel
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
2-3
Siemens
SRA 4
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
FAL
Frame Alignment Loss
FDM
Frequency Division Multiplexing
FEBE
Far End Block Error
FEC
Forward Error Control
FERF
Far End Receive Failure
FIR
Finite Impulse Response filter
HCDR
High Capacity Digital Radio
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HOVC
Higher Order Virtual Container
HPA
Higher order Path Adaption
HPA
High Power Amplifier
HPC
Higher order Path Connection
HPT
Higher order Path Termination
2-4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
HUG
Higher order Unit Group
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
ISC
International Switching Center
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
ITU-R
International Telecom Union - Radio
ITU-T
International Telecom Union - Transmission
LAN
Local Area Network
LCN
Local Communication Network
LO
Local Oscillator
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOM
Loss Of Multiframe
LOP
Loss Of Pointer
LOS
Loss Of Signal
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
2-5
Siemens
SRA 4
LOVC
Lower Order Virtual Container
LPA
Lower order Path Adaption
LPC
Lower order Path Connection
LPT
Lower order Path Termination
LT
Line Terminal
LTE
Line Terminal Equipment
MAN
Metropolitan Area Network
MCF
Message Communication Function
MD
Mediation Device
MF
Mediation Function
MS
Multiplex Section
MSOH
Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
2-6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
MTS
Multiplex Timing Source
MW
Microwave
NB
Narrow Band
NE
Network Element
NEF
Network Element Function
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
OH
Overhead
OHA
Overhead Access
OL
Oscillatore Locale (Local oscillator)
OLC
Optical Loop Carrier
OLI
Optical Line Interface
OOF
Out Of Frame
PABX
Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
2-7
Siemens
SRA 4
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PI
Physical Interface
PIOP
Parallel Input Output Port
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
POH
Path Overhead
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
REI
Remote Error Indication
RF
Radio Frequency
RPI
Radio Physical Interface
RPS
Radio Protection Switching
RS
Regenerator Section
RSOH
Regenerator Section Overhead
RST
Regenerator Section Termination
2-8
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
RT
Transceiver
SA
Section Adaptation
SC-DRO
Self Converting DRO
SCS
Switching Control Signal
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SMD
Surface Mounted Device
SMN
SDH Management Network
SMS
SDH Management Subnetwork
SOH
Section Overhead
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
SPI
SDH Physical Interface
SPS
Synchronous protection switching
SSPA
Solid State Power Amplifier
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
2-9
Siemens
SRA 4
STI
Single Tributary Interface
STM
Synchronous Transport Module
STM-N
Synchronous Transport Module (level) N
SW
Switching
TCM
Trellis Code Modulation
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
TU
Tributary Unit
TUG
Tributary Unit Group
VC
Virtual Container
VCO
Voltage Control Oscillator
WB
Wide Band
WES
Weighted Evaluation Strategy
WST
West Side Traffic
2-10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Concepts and Characteristics in SDH

Technology
3.1
General
Given the application of novel concepts and characteristics used in SDH technology, the
following paragraphs contain general information regarding the synchronous hierarchy.
Signal processing in SDH equipment is carried out in accordance with ITU-T
Recommendations G.707 to G.709, G.781 to G.784 and G.957 to G.958.
The SDH is a hierarchically configured set of digital transport structures which have been
standardized to facilitate the transmission of payload signals in transmission networks.
The basic digital structure of the SDH hierarchy is formed by the frame of the so-called
synchronous transport module, first hierarchical level at 155.520 Mbit/s, indicated by the
acronym STM-1.
3.2
SDH Structure
3.2.1
Introduction
A new generation of transmission systems based on the SDH hierarchy (synchronous digital
hierarchy) has been developed because of the need to overcome the limitations of
plesiochronous multiplexing (PDH).
The SDH hierarchy, standardized through ITU-T recommendations G.707, G.708 and G.709,
answers the need of telecommunications administrations for a network that associates a high
performance level with those characteristics of flexibility and manageability which are required
to cope with growing user demands, both in terms of multiple services and direct supervision
of the resources used.
We have also seized the opportunity offered by global redefinition of frame structure and
transmission system characteristics to obtain further advantages in terms both of management
of low speed digital streams originating from existing networks and of equipment simplification.
The "synchronous" multiplex technology allows to configure the sequence of bit groups in the
frame in order to permit the extraction/insertion (drop/insert) of low speed digital data (for
example a 34 Mbit/s signal in a 155 Mbit/s stream) without the use of costly
multiplex/demultiplex procedures in the knots of the network, that is without influencing at the
same time other digital signals contained in the high speed stream.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
3-1
SRA 4
Siemens
3.2.2
Objectives of the synchronous digital hierarchy
Recommendations G.707, G.708, and G.709 describe the synchronous hierarchy, the frame
structure at the 155.520 Mbit/s STM-1 base level (synchronous transport module 1st order) and
the multiplex method (mapping) for information signals that correspond to hierarchical levels
which have already been defined for plesiochronous hierarchies.
The main objectives which have been pursued during the definition of recommendation
regarding SDH are:
definition of useable knots as a transmission vehicle to a "multivendor" environment and

the corresponding management system (TMN -telecommunication management network);
harmonization of two plesiochronous hierarchies, European and American, creating a

worldwide standard;
standardization of service information contained in the overhead (OH)
Apart from these general objectives, the introduction of the SDH hierarchy offers the
opportunity to develop a new generation of transmission equipment with the following
advantages:
standardization of line interfaces, both at the electro/optical and the frame format level;
use of auxiliary channels and standardized control bits, inserted into the same multiplex frame of the main signal;
easy access to tributary signals and simplified multiplex/demultiplex operations;
simplification of insertion/extraction functions for tributaries into/from an aggregate stream

(drop/insert) and permutation of digital streams (cross-connect);
cost reduction by using the possibilities offered by the synchronous frame structure, such
as:
3-2
compatibility between equipment of different origins, obtained through:
automatic centralized management of the transmission network;
possibility to develop new typologies for more efficient networks in terms of reconfiguration capability (especially in the access portion) and simplification of the reconfiguration protocol for network protection;
equipment integration through combining line terminal and multiplex;
simplified structures for multiplex, ADM (add/drop multiplexer), and DCX (digital crossconnect);
development of systems with flexible structure which allow the installation of a new network, including dedicated networks, MAN, B-ISDN.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Also in the ETSI environment there is an extensive activity for standardization of SDH, with the
scope to adapt this equipment to European applications through a restriction of the options
foreseen in the ITU-T environment.
3.2.3
Digital structure of SDH signals
The basic digital structure of the SDH hierarchy is formed by the frame of the so-called
synchronous transport module, first hierarchical level, indicated by the acronym STM-1.
Through a process of multiplexing and linking of the STM-1 octet, transport modules of higher
order are formed (STM-N).
The STM-1 can be arrived at by constructing previous digital structures, so-called
administrative units (AU) containing signals (TUG) which in turn have been obtained by
multiplex processes and octet linking of lower capacity digital structures. These consist of TUs
(tributary units) which in turn contain the so-called virtual containers (VC) which transport the
containers (C) with the useful signal.
Fig. 3.1 shows schematically the multiplex structure foreseen by the ETSI standard (European
telecomunications standard institute).
Fig. 3.1 shows also the transport capacity values of the single digital structures obtained by
summing the transport capacity of the inferior structure with the POH bytes, the bytes required
for allocation of pointers, and possible stuffing bytes. For AU4 and TU3 structures, further detail
is reported in the following paragraphs.
3.2.4
STM-1 frame structure
Fig. 3.2 shows the frame structure of an STM-1 signal. A frame consists of 9 lines, each
containing 270 bytes. Each byte is composed of 8 bits.
The frame frequency (8 kHz) has been selected in such a way that 1 byte of the frame
corresponds to the transmission capacity of a 64 kbit/s channel.
The overall transport capacity is:
CSTM-1 = 8 (9 270) 8 103 = 155.520 Mbit/s
a
a) number of bits composing each byte

b) overall number of bytes in each frame
c)
frame frequency
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
3-3
SRA 4
Siemens
Essentially, each frame is composed of:
one frame head, called SOH (section overhead), shown in Fig. 3.3, which occupies the first
9 bytes of each line except the fourth, and is used for transmission of service information;
the rest of 261x9 bytes plus the first 9 bytes of the fourth line which represent the administrative unit AU-4. The administrative units (AU) are digital structures of higher order contained in the STM-1 frame and are particularly suitable for the operational of the SDH network, such as for example the rerouting of digital streams for protection of the network.
3.2.5
Administrative unit AU-4
The administrative unit AU-4 is composed of two parts (Fig. 3.4):
the overhead of the administrative unit (AUOH) which occupies the first 9 bytes of the fourth
line in the frame;
the so-called payload which occupies the remaining 261x 9 bytes, divided into time cells
with a given address.
Its overall transport capacity is:

CAU-4 = 8 (9 + 261 9) 8 103 = 150.912 Mbit/sec
a
a) bits composing each single byte

b) bytes occupied by "AUOH"
c)
bytes available for the payload
d) frequency of the STM-1 frame

The 9 AUOH bytes contain the address of the time cell where the payload starts (Fig. 3.5).
The structure of the payload, called VC-4, is in turn composed of two parts:
3-4
a field of 9x260 bytes called C-4 (container) where the real payload signal is deposited;
an additional part of 9 bytes called POH (path overhead) used for transmission of service
channels.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
The transport capacity of VC-4 coincides with that of AU-4, less the AUOH, and is equal to
150.336 Mbit/s; the transport capacity of the container C-4 however is 149.760 Mbit/s, that is
equal to that of the VC-4 without POH.
The virtual container VC-4 is not tied up in a rigid position inside the container AU-4; in fact, the
pointer information, used in the AUOH, always allows to identify the time cell in which the first
byte (J) of the POH can be found, as shown in Fig. 3.6.
If a frequency variation occurs between the frame STM-1 and VC-4, the value of the pointer,
that is of the address, is automatically reduced according to the requirements, accompanied by
a positive or negative stuffing procedure. This allows to free the timing of the payload (VC-4)
from the transport module (STM); Such a frame structure, foreseen by the SDH standard,
allows the network to operate correctly even in the presence of digital streams to be transported
and/or network elements with clocks that are not locked to the synchronization clock of the
network. This occurs essentially for two reasons:
to allow the SDH network to transport streams of the present plesiochronous hierarchy;
to face possible faults and/or malfunctions and inevitable disturbances in the distribution
system for network synchronization.
In fact, even in a completely synchronous network, the phase of the various signals which arrive
in a knot, may differ from each other because of different propagation times and time variants
due to variations in the propagation time because of temperature variations and/or jitter
introduced by the line regenerators.
3.2.6
STM-RR frame structure (Sub STM-1)
Fig. 3.7 shows the frame structure of an STM-RR signal. A frame comprises 9 lines, each one
containing 96 bytes. Each byte consists of 8 bits. The transmitted capacity is equal to
55,296 Mbit/s.
3.2.7
AU-3 Administrative unit
The 21x2 or 34 Mbit/s plesiochrone interface maps the payload in an AU-3; an AU-3 only is
inserted in the STM-RR frame.
The STM-1 synchronous interface comprises an input section and an output section.
The input section receives an STM-1 structure (standard AU-4), converts the AU-4 mapping in
3xAU-3 and only one, out of the three AU-3, is transmitted to the modulator.
The output section receives from demodulator the STM-RR frame AU-3 mapped, convert if in
AU-4 by inserting all 1 in the two missing TUG-3
Then, it returns an STM-1 frame with an useful payload of 1/3 of the capacity.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
3-5
SRA 4
Siemens
3.2.8
Tributary units and their structure
The container of the VC-4 can be loaded either with a single signal, such as in the case of a
140 Mbit/s tributary, or with various signals with lower transport capacity, called tributary units
(TU). These units contain a field (payload), which is divided in address time cells where the
payload signal to be transported can be loaded, together with a pointer which indicates the
starting point.
As shown in Fig. 3.1, the ETSI scheme foresees three types of tributary units: TU-3, TU-2, and
TU-12.
The tributary units are synchronized by timing signals from the VC-4 in order to tie their timing
together.
The TU structures contain virtual containers (VC) as signals to be transported, which in turn
are composed of a container C into which the actual payload signal is loaded, and of the POH
required for channel related service transmissions (BER, alarms, load identification etc.).
The composition of the TU is shown schematically in Fig. 3.8.
The virtual containers VC can be divided into two groups, depending on their capacity and
structure: VC of a higher order (VC-3 and VC-4), and VC of a lower order (VC-2, VC-11 and
VC-12).
Containers of a higher order have in fact a field defined in one single STM-1 frame (125 s),
those of a lower order have a field in a multiframe composed of four STM-1 frames (500 s).
Anyway, this kind of structure can be assembled and disassembled only at the input or output
of the synchronous SDH network.
3-6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
3.2.9
TU-3 Tributary Unit
The composition of the TU-3 structure is shown in Fig. 3.9.

The transport capacity of structures which are part of TU-3 are:
container C-3:
CC-3 = 8 (84 9) 8 103 = 48.384 Mbit/s

a
container VC-3:
CVC-3 = 8 (9 + 84 9) 8 103 = 48.960 Mbit/s

a
container TU-3:
CTU-3 = 8 (3 + 6 + 85 9) 8 103 = 49.536 Mbit/s

a
where:
a) bit of which all bytes are composed
b) STM-1 frame frequency
c)
byte composing C-3
d) byte composing POH of VC-3

e) byte for pointer allocation
f)
fixed stuffing byte
g) byte composing VC-3
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
3-7
SRA 4
Siemens
3.2.10
Mapping
A virtual container can be seen as a frame structure capable of transporting a signal through a
synchronous network which belongs to the normal existing plesiochronous hierarchy,
accompanied by the dedicated service information POH for the transit through this network.
Hence, the transport capacity of the VC, without POH and therefore in coincidence with the
capacity of its own container "C", must always be greater than the bit rate of the plesiochronous
signal to be transported.
In fact, time spaces must be available which must be reserved for the stuffing procedure which
is necessary to recuperate the inevitable frequency differences between the clock of the
plesiochronous signal and that of the virtual container.
In practice, other than the bits necessary for the stuffing procedure, further time space is
available in each container, which is used by overhead bits and fixed stuffing bits.
3.2.11
Loading a 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal in the VC-4
From the mapping function recommended by ITU-T for loading of a 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous
signal into the VC-4, shown in Fig. 3.10, we can deduct that the VC-4 with reference to its own
clock, is capable of an information bit load which is variable between a minimum of:
[9 (20 12 + 1) 8 + 54] 8 103 = 139.248 Mbit/s
a
obtained by imposing in each frame a fixed stuffing (S=R) for the "S" bits of Fig. 3.10, and a
maximum of:
[9 (20 12 + 1) 8 + 54 + 9] 8 103 = 139.320 Mbit/s
a
obtained by imposing in each frame the loading of information bits (S=1) for the "S" bits of
Fig. 3.10.
a) bytes per column
b) columns containing only information bits
c)
bits of each byte
d) information bits in the first column of the 20th block in Fig. 3.10
e) frame frequency (STM-1)
f)
total of "S" bits in each frame
Fig. 3.10 also shows that the following is loaded into the C-4 container:
3-8
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
(9 x 10) x 8 x 103 = 0.72 Mbit/s

(9 x 5) x 8 x 103 = 0.36 Mbit/s
9 x (13 x 8 + 5 x 5 + 1) x 8 x 103 = 9.36 Mbit/s
3.2.12
of overhead (0 in Fig. 3.10))

for transmission of the stuffing
message (C in Fig. 3.10)
for fixed stuffing (R in Fig. 3.10).
Loading a 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal in the VC-3
From the mapping function recommended by ITU-T for the loading of a plesiochronous
34 Mbit/s signal into the VC-3, as shown in Fig. 3.11, one can deduce that the VC-3, with
reference to its own clock, has a capacity for information bits that varies between a minimum of:
[9 (3 19) 8 + 189] 8 103 = 34.344 Mbit/s
a
obtained by forcing in each frame a fixed stuffing (S=R) for the "S" bits in Fig. 3.11, and a
maximum of:
[9 (3 19) 8 + 189 + 6] 8 103 = 34.392 Mbit/s
a
obtained by forcing in each frame the loading of information bits (S=I) for the "S" bits in Fig. 3.11
a) byte per column

b) columns containing only information bits
c)
bits of each byte
d) information bits contained in the last columns of Fig. 3.11

e) frame frequency (STM-1)
f)
total number of "S" bits in each frame
From Fig. 3.11 on can also deduce that the following is loaded into the C-3 container:
(2 2 9) 8 103 = 0,288 Mbit/s
(22 9 8 + 129) 8 103 = 13.704 Mbit/s
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
for transmission of the stuffing

message (C1, C2 in Fig. 3.11, that is:
6 bits for S1 and 6 bits for S2)
for fixed stuffing (R in Fig. 3.11)
3-9
SRA 4
Siemens
3.3
SDH transmission network
3.3.1
General description
The benefits introduced by the new synchronous SDH hierarchy allows to predict an evolution
of transmission networks toward flexible structures with dynamic reconfiguration capability and
monitoring and supervision functions, controlled by an efficient management system (TMN =
telecomunications management network).
The fundamental nodes of this architecture are replaced by network elements (NE = network
elements) with flexible drop/insert functions and, more generally, cross-connect.
The SDH transmission equipment can be divided into two groups:
Line repeaters with regeneration functions which communicate at the RSOH level, in other
words at the lower level of the section status. The use of regenerators is limited to long distance connections and a very limited number of cases in urban and connection networks.
Terminal knots which change and elaborate the incoming information stream. They often
also include the multiplex function of digital structures in the STM-N frame, evidencing typical characteristics of SDH network elements, such as the fact that there is no distinction
between multiplex frames and line signal, this way allowing an integration of the equipment.
For this reason, these terminals also a function as a terminal at the section level (managing
also the SOH).
The following equipment represents terminal knots:
MUX both in a terminal and an add-drop (ADM) configuration, which provide flexibility
in the access area (both TU and AU);
DXC-TU (Digital Cross-connect Tributary Unit), which provides flexibility for the transit
of already synchronized streams in the network;
DXC-AU (digital cross-connect administrative unit), used preferably for network protection and therefore located in centers with higher hierarchical levels.
Fig. 3.12 shows an example of the SDH network, implemented with the above mentioned
equipment.
3-10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
3.3.2
Multiplex section and regenerator section
In an SDH network, the "multiplex section" includes all equipment used to transport information
between two consecutive knots of the network.
Hence, it includes both the equipment (MUX or DCC) in the two knots and the possible line
repeaters, obviously in addition to the actual transmission equipment. While the "repeater
section", which refers exclusively to the single hops of a connection, include both the
transmission equipment and the two pieces of equipment they link up with.
Some examples in Fig. 3.13 are taken from Fig. 3.12.
Each multiplex section is assigned a part of the SOH in the STM-1 frame, or more generally in
the STM-N frame, called "MSOH" to fulfill the following functions:
Pointers
Automatic switching
Parity check
Transmission alarm
Data channels (DCC = data communication channel)
Service telephone channels (express)
In SDH networks, the automatic switching equipment (channel protection) are at the level of the
multiplex section (terminals).
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
3-11
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
3-12
CHANGE LEVEL
49.152
7X
TUG2
3X
2304
TU3
6.912
6.912
TU12
VC3
48.384
TU2
6.848
2.240
VC2
C2
VC12
C12
1.664
VC11
1.600
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
2.176
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
6.784
C3
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
48.960
C4
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
149.760
C11
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
49.536
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
VC4
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
TUG3
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
3X
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
150.336
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
150.912
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
(155)
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaa
aaaa aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
AU4
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM1
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Fig. 3.1
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Siemens
SRA 4
SDH multiplex structure (ETSI)

LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
ALL VALUES IN MBIT/S
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
STM-1 frame structure

aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Fig. 3.2
Siemens
aaa
aaa
aaa
261
RSOH
aaa
aaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
270 BYTES
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT
9 LINES
aaa
aaa
aaa
"AU-4"
5
MSOH
Frame lenght = 125 sec

RSOH = Regenerator Section Overhead
MSOH = Multiplexer Section Overhead
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
3-13
SRA 4
Siemens
Details of section bytes inside the OH

1
A2
J0
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
POINTER AU
4
B2
K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
Bytes reserved for

national usage
B2
B2
Z1
Z1
Z2
M1
E2
Bytes reserved for

media specific usage
Byte
3-14
Z2
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
RSOH
MSOH
X
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
Fig. 3.3
Bytes reserved for

future standardization
Associated functions
A1,A2
Frame alignment word
J0
Path trace identifier
D1...D12
Data channels for network management (DCCM, DCCR)
E1,E2
Audio channels for service communications
F1
User service
B1
Bytes used for bit error detection in a regenerator section
B2
Bytes used for bit error detection in a multiplex section
K1,K2
Bytes used for the switching procedure in a multiplex section
Z1,Z2
For future use
S1
Byte for the management of the synchronism quality
M1
Byte FEBE (Far End Block Error)
6 bytes reserved for national usage
6 bytes available only in RSOH, for applications that depend on the physical
means (media specific bytes)
The remaining 26 bytes are available for future standardization
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
Fig. 3.4
BYTES
9
BYTES
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
SRA 4
Siemens
Composition of the AU-4

BYTES
261
AUOH
PAYLOAD
TIME CELLS
AU-4
FRAME 125 SEC
3-15
SRA 4
Siemens
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
Composition of the AU-4 and C-4 structures

aaa
aaa
Fig. 3.5
261
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
AU-4
RSOH
AUOH
261
POH
J1
B3
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
STM-1
VC-4
aaa
aaa
aaa
C2
5
G1
MSOH
F2
C-4
H4
F3
K3
N1
J1 Channel identification (path identifier)

B3 Parity byte for BER detection in the channel
C2 Indication:channel equipped/not equipped/not used
G1 Channel status message for the transmitter
F2 Subscriber messages
H4 Indication of various connected frames (for special payload signals)
F3 Subscriber messages
K3 Byte used for the switching procedure in a multiplex section
N1 Tandem connection monitoring function
3-16
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 3.6
Siemens
Fluctuations of the VC-4 inside the payload

270 BYTES
9 BYTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
261 BYTES
SECTION OVERHEAD
SOH
STM PAYLOAD
AU POINTER
SECTION OVERHEAD
SOH
9
LINES
P
STM-1
FOLLOWING
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
3-17
SRA 4
Siemens
aaa
aaa
aaa
STM-RR frame structure

aaa
aaa
Fig. 3.7
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
87
87
RSOH
AU3 PTR
P
O
aaa
aaa
H
5
MSOH
F
O
R
C-3
V
C
3
3-18
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
aaaa
aaaa
TU12
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
PTR
PTR
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
PTR
VC2
VC12
PTR
VC11
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
VC3
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
TU2
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
TU3
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Fig. 3.8
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
SRA 4
Siemens
Composition of the TU structure

POH
+
C3
POH
C2
POH
C12
POH
C11
VC-11 is alternative to VC-12
3-19
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
3-20
H1 595596
H2
H3 0 1
TU-3 PAYLOAD 1
P
O
H
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaa
aaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaa
Fig. 3.9
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaa
aaa aaa
aaa aaa
aaa aaa
aaa aaa
aaaa aaa aaa
aaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Siemens
SRA 4
Composition of structures C-3, VC-3 and TU-3

TU-3 PTR
85
763764
82 83 84
84
C-3
Fixed stuffing bytes
VC3
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 3.10 Loading a 140 Mbit/s signal into a VC-4

VC-4
260
P
O
H
C-4
9 LINES X 13 COLUMNS X 20 BLOCKS
12
8I
96 I
12
CRRRRROO
96 I
1
8R
12
96 I
12
8R
96 I
8R
12
96 I
12
CRRRRROO
96 I
12
8R
96 I
8R
12
96 I
12
12
8R
96 I
CRRRRROO
96 I
9
W
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
BLOCK 4
BLOCK 5
12
12
12
12
8R
96 I
8R
96 I
8R
96 I
CRRRRROO
96 I
8R
12
96 I
BLOCK 6
1
8R
12
96 I
1
8R
BLOCK 7
12
96 I
Y
BLOCK 8
BLOCK 9
BLOCK 10
12
12
CRRRRROO
96 I
8R
96 I
IIIIII
12
SR
96 I
9
Y
BLOCK 11 BLOCK 12 BLOCK 13
= RRRRRR C1 C2
BLOCK 14
2006 Siemens AG
X
BLOCK 18
I = INFORMATION BIT
R = FIXED STUFFING
CCCCC = 00000 : S=I

CCCCC = 11111 : S=R
S =STUFFING OPPORTUNITY
W = IIIIIIII
O = OVERHEAD BIT (=R)
X = CRRRRROO
Y = RRRRRRRR
Z = IIIIIISR
C = STUFFING MESSAGE
IMC 0033METD6-13
BLOCK 15 BLOCK 16 BLOCK 17
Y
BLOCK 19
Z
BLOCK 20
3-21
3-22
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
P
O
H
= RRRRRR C1 C2
= RRRRRRRR
AB
= RRRRRRR S1 S2 IIIIIII
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
9
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
SPEED = 34368 kbit/s
C-3
1 3
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Siemens
SRA 4
Fig. 3.11 Loading a 34 Mbit/s signal into a VC-3

VC-3
84
VC-3
1 3
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I 3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I 3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I 3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
3x8 I
AB8
I
I = INFORMATION BIT
R =STUFFING
S1, S2 = STUFFING BITS
C1, C2 = STUFFING MESSAGE
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
unit
TU
= Level of trib. unit
TMN = Telecommunication
Communication
Channel
34
140
T-TU
DXC-AU
Microwave
Radio
STM-1
Optical
fiber
DXC-TU
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Optical
fiber
140
STM-4
STM-1
Optical
fiber
STM-1
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-1
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
NEWORK
MANAGEMENT
(TMN)
STM-1
RING
34 140
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-4
AD-AU
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-4
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
AD-TU
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-1
140
34
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Optical
fiber
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
STM-4
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
Optical
fiber
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-1
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
Optical
fiber
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
140
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
RING
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-4
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
STM-4
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
140
DXC-TU
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
= Repeater
= Terminal
T-TU
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
STM-1
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
Optical
fiber
DXC-AU
STM-16
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
140
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
DXC-AU
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
T-AU
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
Management
Network
DCC = Data
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
2
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
AD
= Add-Drop
DXC = Cross-Connect
AU
= Level of administrative
2
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
34
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
Optical
fiber
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-4
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
R
T
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
STM-16
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
STM-16
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
STM-16
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa aaaaaaaaaa
aaaa aaaaaaaaaa
aaaa aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
STM-1
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 3.12 Example of an SDH network

34 140
Microwave
Radio
STM-1
Microwave
Radio
AD-AU
Optical
fiber
STM-4
STM-1
140
STM-1
2 34 140
AD-TU
STM-1
Optical
fiber
AD-TU
2 34 140
3-23
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 3.13 Examples for the multiplex and regenerator section

STM-4
STM-1
A)
T-AU
140
STM-16
REGENERATOR
SECTION
B)
Fiber
STM-4
DXC-AU
MULTIPLEXER
SECTION
R
MULTIPLEXER
SECTION
Fiber
STM-16
REGENERATOR
SECTION
Fiber
DXC-AU
STM-16
DXC-AU
MULTIPLEXER
SECTION
DXC-TU
STM-1
Radio
C)
STM-1
AD-TU
3-24
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Introduction
Foreword
This Training Manual describes the SRA 4 6-13 GHz equipment, SVR 4.8, with wideband ODU.
4.1
General Information
SRA 4 is a Point to Point Broadband Wireless System adopting an Indoor-Outdoor architecture

at 6L GHz, 6U GHz, 7 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 11 GHz and 13 GHz with 128 TCM - 4D or 64
TCM-4D modulation with SDH interfaces fitting recommended radio channel arrangements listed in par. 4.1.1.
Ease and speed of link set-up, broadband availability and fiber quality, SRA 4 is the most reliable and convenient solution for a wide range of applications such as:
SDH and traditional ATM transport networks;
LMDS, BWA networks;
UMTS/GSM cellular infrastructure networks.
The radio system SRA 4 has been designed to transmit the following signals:
SDH (STM-1)
The frame structure of the transmitted signal has the 155.520 Mbit/s bit rate with 128 TCM - 4D
or 64 TCM-4D modulation.
With the 128 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 28 MHz.
With the 64 TCM-4D modulation the spacing for the 1xSTM-1 is 40 MHz.
The SRA 4 is available with two types of ODU:
WB ODU (Wide Band)
NB ODU (Narrow Band)
By means of the LCT the WB ODU can be frequency-shifted into a sub-band of
the RF band, while the NB ODU's are tuned to a specific RF channel and cannot
be frequency shifted by the LCT.
The WB ODUs are described in this manual.
The WB ODU is supplied in two versions:
ODU AP for AP channelling only
ODU AP/CC for AP or CC channelling.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-1
SRA 4
Siemens
The NB ODUs are described in the SRA 4 Training Manual IMC 0033METD15-26.
The SRA 4 is available with two types of IDU:
SRA 4 IDU
SRA 4 IDU-STM1.
4.1.1
RF channeling
Tab. 4.1, Tab. 4.2, Tab. 4.3, Tab. 4.4, Tab. 4.5 and Tab. 4.6 show the frequency bands (according to the RF channeling) of the radio digital system SRA 4.
Tab. 4.1
Frequency bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
5925 - 6425
(6L)
ITU-R F.383-7
29.65
44.49
252.04
6430 - 7110
(6U)
ITU-R F.384-7
40
60
340
Tab. 4.2
4-2
RF 6 GHz channelling
Frequency bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
7110-7750 (lower)
ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3
28
84 copolar
196
7110-7750 (upper)
28
56 copolar
168
7125-7425
ITU-R F.385-6
(F0=7275)
28
depending
on channels
used
161
7425-7900
28
49 copolar
245
7425-7725
28
42 copolar
154
7425-7725
ITU-R F.385-6
(F0=7575)
28
depending
on channels
used
161
7125-7425
Custom (Finland)
28
56 copolar
168
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Tab. 4.3
Siemens
Frequency bands
(MHz)
7725-8275
7900-8400 (8U)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel
spacing (MHz)
29.65
8200-8500
OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6
Annex 4
ITU-R F.386-6
46.648
8200-8500
28
Tab. 4.4
28
Centre gap
(MHz)
103.77
crosspolar
70
crosspolar
58.32
copolar
49
crosspolar
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
311.32
266
151.614
119
Frequency bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel spacing
(MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
10000-10680
CEPT.Rec.12-05
28
98
350
Tab. 4.5
Frequency bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
10700-11700
ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1
40
90 crosspolar
530
10700-11700
ITU-R F.387 Annex 1
40
130
crosspolar
530
10700-11700
ITU-R F.387 Annex 2
40
50 crosspolar
490
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-3
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 4.6
Frequency bands
(MHz)
Recommendation
Co/cross-polar
adjacent channel
spacing (MHz)
Centre gap
(MHz)
Shifter
Freq.
(MHz)
12750-13750
ITU-R F.497-6
28
70 crosspolar
266
4.1.2
System configurations
There are 11 different base configurations, identified by a number called System Type; the
controller on the IDU configures the whole equipment according to this value.
The available system types are listed in the following Tab. 4.7.
Tab. 4.7
Base System Types
Type
Description
Channeling
1
1+0 Terminal without Multiplex Section Termination (MST) (note 1)
AP
2
1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary
AP
Interface) (note 1)
3
1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary
AP
Interface) (note 1)
4
1+1 Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary
AP
Interface) (note 2)
5
1+1 Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double Tributary
AP
Interface) (note 2)
6
2+0 Terminal without MST (note 1)
AP or CC
7
2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Single
CC
Tributary Interface) (note 2)
8
2x(1+1) Frequency Diversity Terminal without MST (with Double
CC
9
2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Single
CC
10 2x(1+1) Hot Stand-by (HSBY) Terminal without MST (with Double
CC
11 N+1 Terminal without MST (with Single Tributary Interface) (note 2)
AP
Note 1: Configuration with SRA4 IDU and SRA4 IDU-STM1.
Note 2: Configuration with SRA4 IDU only.
4-4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
SRA 4 radio equipment is built up by:

1.
one indoor unit (IDU indoor unit), providing the base band;
2.
one or N outdoor equipment (ODU, outdoor unit), containing RF devices, connected with
the IDU through an IF (Intermediate Frequency) cable.
3.
one optional external EOW assembly
The configurations of the indoor unit and the control programs are different according to the selected system type and configuration.
The optional "EXTERNAL EOW" assembly, which provides the EOW
functionalities, is described in the relevant UMN manual
4.1.3
Technology
System design is based on the use of the most advanced technologies and a big effort has
been made to transfer complexity from analog to digital hardware to take advantage of customised integration (ASlCs) and to improve system reliability.
The biggest and most sophisticated ASIC designed for communication systems is the heart of
SRA 4 modem.
System design is based on a full digital concept. This approach takes extensive advantage of
the most recent technological achievements leading to VLSI circuit solutions, the most suitable
for managing digital signals.
In addition, this approach ensures a very high manufacturing quality, with an extremely reliable
performance.
4.1.4
Modulation types
The SRA 4 adopts 128 or 64 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenated coding modulation.
The major benefit of this modulation format is a strongly enhanced error correction capability
and bit error rate performance if compared with conventional QAM systems.
A very powerful data interleaving scatters the errors to reach an even, fiber-like error distribution while maintaining a minimal system delay.
A powerful equaliser adapts the equalisation algorithm to the communication channel parameters. Blind or decision aided adaptive equalisation are run with the best performances at any
channel condition.
64 or 128 TCM-4D with Reed Solomon concatenated coding, a powerful pointer protection together with tailored interleavers, makes an excellent bearer for traffic requiring errorless transmission media.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-5
SRA 4
Siemens
4.1.5
System building blocks
The SRA 4 digital radio system is characterized by the high operating frequency. For this reason, in order to minimize the feeder loss an indoor/outdoor split configuration has been choosen. The indoor part consists of a rack ETSI and one IDU. The IDU, with base band units and
modem, is connected by means of single coaxial IF cable to a very compact outdoor transceiver
located close to the antenna (see Fig. 4.1).
Two types of ODU are available: AP and AP/CC.
The first type (AP) is available within the 7, 8, 10, 11, 13 GHz bands for AP channelling and
implements waveguide-connections (RF) towards the antenna and cable-connections (IF)
towards the IDU.
The second type (AP/CC) is available within the 6L, 6U, 7, 8, 11, 13 GHz bands for the AP
or CC channelling, and implements for the AP configurations RF waveguide-connections
towards the antenna, and cable-connections (IF) towards the IDU; connections between
the two ODUs are also implemented for the CC configurations.
4.1.5.1
Indoor section
Two versions of the IDU are available:
4-6
SRA4 IDU:
Main Capabilities:
Bit Rate: 1 or 2xSMT-1
Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 FD DTI / 1+1 HSBY STI / 1+1 HSBY
DTI / 2+0 STI-DTI-CC WB/ 2x(1+1) FD STI / 2x(1+1) FD DTI / 2x(1+1) HSBY STI /
2x(1+1) HSBY DTI / N+1 STI
2 Mb/s WST
V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services
Co-Channel /X-PIC
WB and NB ODU supported
SRA4 IDU-STM1:
Main Capabilities:
Bit Rate: 1xSMT-1
Supported system types: 1+0 / 1+1 FD STI / 1+1 HSBY STI / 2+0 STI
V11, G703 64 Kbits/s services
WB ODU supported
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
1+0/2+0/1+1 configuration (SRA 4 IDU and SRA 4 IDU-STM1)

The indoor section consists of one IDU.
The IDU consists of baseband interfaces for data and management, two BB/Modem units, a
Controller unit, an Alarm Restitution Unit and a Fan unit. A single coaxial IF cable connecting
the BB/Modem unit with a very compact outdoor transceiver located close to the antenna.
An unprotected 1+0 system consists of one assembly equipped with only one BB/Modem unit;
a 1+1/2+0 system consists of an assembly equipped with two BB/Modem units (refer to Fig. 4.2
for SRA 4 IDU and Fig. 4.3 for SRA 4 IDU-STM1).
Each BB/Modem unit is connected to the outdoor unit through a single coaxial cable where
main signal, indoor-outdoor service data and outdoor power supply are sent together. The indoor unit is totally independent of the RF band chosen for the outdoor unit, making the system
very flexible and easy to deploy.
The SOH bytes can be used to transmit two 64 kbit/s service channels and a 2 Mbit/s WST.
The STM-1 interface can be either electrical or optical.
Fig. 4.6 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA 4 IDU.
Fig. 4.7 shows the 1+0 block diagram of the SRA 4 IDU-STM1.
2x(1+1) configuration (SRA 4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs.
Fig. 4.4 illustrate 2x(1+1) system.
System 2x(1+1) system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units.
N+1 configuration (SRA 4 IDU)
The indoor section consists of two IDUs.
Fig. 4.5 illustrates a 2+1 and 3+1 protected system.
System 2+1 consists of two IDU subracks and of three BB/Modem units. The 3+1 system consists of two IDU subracks and of four BB/Modem units.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-7
SRA 4
Siemens
4.1.6
Outdoor section
AP ODU (Transceiver for AP channelling)

Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 4.8.
The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit and function
integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutions have been adopted
to reach the system objectives.
Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of a single
coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IF diplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers.
The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) to the transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for message communication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units.
The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits:
Power supply unit:

Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm for failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primary lightning protection;
IF unit:
is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit, IDU/
ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexer addresses the IF
and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK subcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180 MHz), is down-converter to 140
MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.
Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF):

designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter, receiver
and VCOs.
Dual UHF VCO:

is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on the mechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips.
Filter duplexer:
ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.
Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not need to be
open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance and test phases.
4-8
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
AP/CC ODU (Transceiver for AP or CC channelling)

Reference to the block diagram of Fig. 4.9.
The conventional block lay-out of the transceiver exploits a high degree of circuit and function
integration. Also for this part of the system high level technological solutions have been adopted
to reach the system objectives.
Being the outdoor transceiver connected to the internal terminating unit by means of a single
coaxial cable, it is necessary to have an overvoltage protection circuit and an IF diplexer in order to separate the Tx and Rx modulated carriers.
The in/out connecting cable is also used for the supply of battery D. C. voltage(-48V) to the transceiver and for the transmission of service subcarriers for message communication (alarms, received field, etc.) between the indoor and outdoor units.
With CC operations the two ODU's must be synchronized in Rx.
This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the two ODU's.
Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RF frequency to 2180
MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180 MHz to 140 MHz).
In the 6 GHz ODU only one conversion (from RF to 140 MHz) is present.
With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master (generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives the synchronisms from
the ODU Master).
The ODU unit is equipped by the following subunits:
Power supply unit:

Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm for failures, extracts the DC voltage from the cable and ensures the primary lightning protection;
IF unit:
is a transversal subunit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit, IDU/
ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller. Here a triplexer addresses the IF
and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK subcarriers toward the modem. The Tx IF (350 MHz) is up-converted to 1690 MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180 MHz), is down-converter to 140
MHz and sent to the IDU. The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.
Microwave Transceiver Front-End (MWTF):

designed to cover the complete RF band; it includes the microwave transmitter, receiver
and VCOs.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-9
SRA 4
Siemens
Dual UHF VCO:

is a part of the synthesizer used to synchronize the RF VCOs. It is mounted on the mechanical absorber in order to avoid short-term frequency skips.
Filter duplexer:
ensures the tunability in a quarter of the RF band.
Each transceiver is installed in a waterproof housing. The ODU housing does not need to be
open, requiring simple and easy operations during installation/maintenance and test phases.
4.1.7
IDU-ODU interconnection
The IDU-ODU interconnection takes place through a single bi-directional line, carrying the aggregate signal (Tx/Rx radio signal, IDU/ODU auxiliary service channel and ODU power supply).
4.1.7.1
Radio signal
The IDU-ODU connection, regarding the radio signal transmission/reception, includes the IF signals:
350 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Tx signal (from IDU to ODU)
140 MHz modulated signal to transmit the Rx signal (from ODU to IDU).
By using frequencies 350 MHz and 140 MHz it is possible to:
optimize the length, the attenuation and the size of the connection cable IDU-ODU
minimize the filtering functions in IDU and ODU
minimize the interferences between the Tx and Rx sections of the ODU
minimize the interferences between the harmonics of the IF Tx frequency and the shifter
frequencies
obtain the dynamic interval necessary to AGC circuit in IDU and ODU.
4.1.7.2
IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel
An auxiliary channel connects IDU to ODU, carrying all the information for the correct operation
of the equipment (alarms, data channel, speech channel, etc.). The IDU-ODU service connection takes place through two FSK-modulated sub-carriers, with 7 MHz and 10 MHz.
4.1.7.3
ODU power supply
The IDU-ODU interconnection cable is used also to carry the secondary DC voltage (-48 V) to
supply the ODU. The DC voltage comes from the relevant BB+MODEM unit in the IDU.
4-10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
In this unit are also present the soft-start circuits, the current limitation circuits and the alarm
circuits to generate the open cable alarm and the short-circuit on the cable alarm.
4.1.8
System maintenance
A wide range of pole mountings allows an easy ODU installation to cover any possible outdoor
installation condition. Several mounting structures, holding one or more ODUs, are available for
integrated or separated ODU Antenna connections.
A Back-up Memory Key, plugged on the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit in the IDU, contains all the configuration data. Once configured, the system writes all the set-up parameters
on the Back-up Memory Key.
SRA 4 has been designed to simplify as much as possible all the system-related operations,
from installation to supervision, from upgrading to replacement of the units.
4.1.9
System power supply
The system, when 1+0/1+1/2+0 configured, consists of one IDU assembly plus one or two
ODUs; while when 2+1/3+1 configured, it consists of two IDU assemblies and three or four
ODUs.
Each IDU assembly can be powered from any BB/Modem unit or from both through a battery
voltage (-48V20%) delivered by the station.
Protection to power inputting from the station is afforded through the two BB/Modem units in an
IDU assembly implemented by connecting the Vmain to the PWR socket present on BB/Modem
1 and the Vreserve (when required) to the PWR socket present on BB/ Modem 2.
When the Vreserve is not present, the BB/Modem units must be contemporarily powered from
the same power source through two separate cables thereby allowing to carry out maintenance
works on one of the two BB/Modem units without compromising system operation (typical for
1+1 equipment).
The distribution pattern of the auxiliary power supply within the BB Modem units and IDU assembly is illustrated in Fig. 4.10.
The Relay Block (RL) is activated through the manual command (PW1/2__SW1/2o) situated
on the Alarms Restitution unit thereby allowing to distribute the power delivered by the station
to other units.
Should the polarity at the input pins not be compatible, a circuit present on the cited block will
invalidate the manual command thereby not energizing the relay.
After having successfully surpassed the Relay Block, the -48V is decoupled through the diodes in order to parallel-power the two BB/Modem units and relative ODU's.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-11
SRA 4
Siemens
Each BB/Modem unit generates a filtered -48V (-48F) which serves to power the Controller unit
and the Alarms unit: the latter will in turn power the Fan unit. With regard to power supply protection, the -48F are OR'ed on the Back-panel.
A Fan management circuit is fitted on the Alarms Restitution unit. The circuit is powered by a
subsidiary source outputting from the BB/Modem units (3v3BB) that are OR'ed on the Backpanel, and by a power supply (3,3V) generated by the Controller unit (SPI_ALIM). The latter
power supply keeps the circuit live for the management of the Fan circuit should the 3v3BB
source fail.
4.1.10
Facility & services
The SDH signal contains several standardized overhead bytes for operation, maintenance,
communication and performance monitoring functions.
The SOH bytes are divided into two separate areas: the rows 1 to 3 (27 bytes) are accessed
and processed within the Regenerator Section (RS) and are defined Regenerator Section
OverHead (RSOH), while the 45 bytes included in the rows 5 to 9 of the SOH pattern are called
Multiplex Section OverHead (MSOH) bytes and are available for equipment terminating a Multiplex Section (MS).
SRA 4 allows the access to rows 1 to 3 as it is used only as Regenerator Section (RST).
The functions of the various bytes in SOH are summarised in Fig. 4.11 and Tab. 4.8 (according
to ETSI/TM4, ITU-T/G. 708-Study Group 13 and ITU-R Study Group 9), based on the present
proposal for the allocation of 6 "media-specific" bytes: see rows 2 and 3 (S22, S23, S25, S32, S33
and S35) of the RSOH (Regeneration Section OverHead) area.
4-12
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Tab. 4.8
Siemens
Section OverHead bytes

Name and Functions
Byte
Rows 13
A1, A2:
frame alignment bytes
B1:
parity byte for elementary regenerator section BER

monitoring
J0:
path trace identifier
D1 to D3:
Data Comunication Channels (DCCR)
E1:
omnibus/express voice service channel, regeneration section
F1:
64 kbit/s data user channel
Byte reserved for media specific use:

S22
S23
S32
S25, S33, S35
Byte used for ATCP

Byte used for 64 kbit/s data channel or SCS signal in N+1
application
Byte used for supervision
Byte used for the wayside traffic
Bytes reserved for national use:

used by wayside traffic
Bytes reserved for future international standardization:

used temporary by the wayside traffic
4
Total
4.1.10.1
27
Equipment management
SRA 4 management systems carry out all the functions required to minimising operational
costs.
LCT, the system dedicated to the local link management, connects the SRA 4 local and far-and
terminals through the F interface.
In addition NetViewer, combining Element with Network Management functions, is the Radio
Network Manager for all the Siemens Radio Systems.
Security Management, Fault management, Configuration Set-up, Performance Management,
Metering are performed by both LCT and NetViewer, by the former on a link base, by the latter
pointing to each of the Radio Systems connected to the network.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-13
Siemens
SRA 4
Even when the NetViewer is connected to the network, LCT can make the link reconfiguration
at any based network point.
Fig. 4.12 shows SRA 4, running TCP/IP stack.
The system can route management signals either through a pure SDH network (DCC-R) or through any TCP/IP- based DCN.
F interface
The Controller unit makes available outside a 38.4 kbit/s data channel (RS-232C standard) LCT
connector to connect a local PC to configure, preset and supervise the local equipment.
During the normal operation of the equipment the connection to the LCT connector is not necessary; the LCT can be used only during the commissioning and during the local maintenance
activities.
With regard to 1+0/1+1/2+0 systems consisting of only one IDU, the local operator must connect the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLER unit.
With regard to N+1 (2+1/3+1) systems consisting of two IDU's, the local operator must connect
the PC to the LCT connector situated on the front panel of the CONTROLLER unit on the IDU
MAIN assembly (see Fig. 4.4).
Q interface
The IDU makes available outside a data channel to transport the TMN information of a radio
network to the supervisory center.
Channel Q can be accessed externally with the 10/100 BASE-T electrical interface (connector
"Q-LAN" situated on the front panel of the controller unit).
Connector "Q-LAN", situated on the Controller unit, is used on systems 1+0/1+1/2+0 consisting
of an IDU assembly.
Connector "Q-LAN" of the "IDU MAIN" assembly is used on systems N+1 (2+1/3+1) consisting
of two IDU assemblies.
4-14
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.1
SRA 4 Equipment
FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
ODU SUPPORT
ODU
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON THE RACK

OF COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-15
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.2
IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA 4 IDU)

1+0 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
ALARM RESTITUTION Unit

CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
U
S
E
R
WST
V11 G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
Out In
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
Out
ODU PWR
I
O
IF
PS
F
A
N
LCT
CONTROLLER Unit
1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM 1 Unit

CHACHB
U
n.
IDU
Alarms
Key
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
CONTROLLER Unit
4-16
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IF
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
PS
BB-MODEM 2 Unit
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 4.3
Siemens
IDU in 1+0 and 1+1/2+0 configurations (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

1+0 CONFIGURATION
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
CONTROLLER Unit
1+1/2+0 CONFIGURATION
CONTROLLER Unit
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
BB-MODEM 1 Unit
BB-MODEM 2 Unit
4-17
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.4
IDU in 2x(1+1) configuration

ALARM RESTITUTION Unit (1)
CONTROLLER
Unit (1)
IDU V(H)
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
(1)
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
following Table
BB-MODEM (1-1) unit see following Table
CHA CHB
Alarms
BB-MODEM (1-2) unit see
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
(2)
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
BB-MODEM (2-2) unit see following Table

ALARM
RESTITUTION
IDU H(V)
Unit (2)
CONTROLLER Unit (2)
IF
PS
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
IF
In Out
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
In Out
IF
PS
BB-MODEM (2-1) unit see
following Table
Tab. a BB-Modem unit association in 2x(1+1) configuration
4-18
Configuration
BB-Modem (1-1)
BB-Modem (1-2) BB-Modem (2-1) BB-Modem (2-2)
2x(1+1)FD
CH1 V(H)-pol
CH2 V(H)-pol
CH1 H(V)-pol
CH2 H(V)-pol
2x(1+1) HotStby
Main V(H)-pol
Stby V(H)-pol
Main H(V)-pol
Stby H(V)-pol
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.5
IDU in N+1 configuration

2+1 CONFIGURATION
CONTROLLER
Unit (1)
BB-MODEM STBY Unit
IDU MAIN

CHACHB
Alarms
U
n.
IDU
Key
Q-lan E-Link
F
A
N
(1)
LCT
U V11
WST
In Out
G703
S
E
R
STM-1 #1
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
U
S
E
R
WST
V11 G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
PS
ODU PWR
ODU CABLE CO-CH
O
ALM In Out I
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
Out In
CABLE
ALM
ODU PWR
I
O
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
Out
IF
IF
BBMODEM
F1 unit
PS
IF
BBMODEM
F2 unit
PS
F
A
N
(2)
LCT
ALARM
RESTITUTION
Unit (2)
U
n.
STM-1 #2
Out In
CONTROLLER Unit (2)

IDU EXT
3+1 CONFIGURATION
CONTROLLER
Unit (1)
BB-MODEM STBY Unit
CHACHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
(1)
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
IDU
Key
LCT
ALARM
RESTITUTION
Unit (2)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
U
n.
F
A
N
(2)
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
CONTROLLER Unit (2)
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
IDU MAIN
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IF
IF
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
PS
BBMODEM
F1 unit
BBMODEM
F2 unit
BBMODEM
F3 unit
IDU EXT
4-19
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.6
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA 4 IDU)
2 Mbit/s Wayside
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
WS Interface
BB/MODEM UNIT
WS processing
From the second
BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch A
Modulator
A2
DCC
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
DCC, S23
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Switch B
L-RSOH
B1
ODU
Demodulator
B2
From the second
BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
DCC
Power supply
WS processing
DCC
F Interface
E2 EPROM Key
Q Interface
Alarms input/output
LED
4-20
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
DCC
CONTROLLER
UNIT
E2 EPROM
Flash RAM
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 4.7
Siemens
Indoor Section Block Diagram (SRA4 IDU-STM1)

BB/MODEM UNIT
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
1xSTM-1
From the second

BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch A
Modulator
A2
DCC
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
DCC
DCC, S23
1xSTM-1
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Switch B
L-RSOH
B1
ODU
Demodulator
B2
From the second
BB/MODEM unit
Data Interface
Power supply
DCC
DCC
F Interface
E2 EPROM Key
Q Interface
Alarms input/output
LED
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
CONTROLLER
UNIT
E2 EPROM
Flash RAM
4-21
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.8
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP channelling)
350 MHz
Power Supply
140 MHz
4-22
DUAL
VCO
DIPLEXER
Cable 50 ohm
IF
unit
Overvoltage
protection
MWTF
IF
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.9
Outdoor Section Block diagram (ODU for AP/CC channelling)

To/from other
ODU
VCO
2nd Rx
Conversion
IF
Cable 50 ohm
350 MHz
Overvoltage
protection
350 MHz
Down
Converter
2180 MHz
1690 MHz
Up
Converter
IF Unit
RF DUAL VCO
Tx
VCO
DIPLEXER
140 MHz
Power Supply
MWTF
140 MHz
Rx
VCO
To/from other
ODU
With regard to AP operation switch 1 is closed and switches 2-3-4 are open.
With regard to CC operation switches 1-2-4 on the ODU Master are closed and
switch 3 is open. On the ODU Slave, instead, switches 1 and 2 are open and 3-4
closed.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
4-23
4-24
FAN
ALARM
RESTITUTION
CONTROLLER
-VFAN.i
+VFAN.i
-VFAN.o
+VFAN.o
-VF.i
+VF.i
3V3BB.i
PW2_SW1/2.o
SPI_ALIM.i
PW1_SW1/2.o
to ODU
cable
-VF.o
-VMAIN
-48F
DC/DC
cable
control
+
insert IF
C-IF
-48F
DC/DC
BB BASE
Modem
BAND 2 2
-VF.o
+VF.o
3V3BB.o
terziary p.s.
MODEM 2
-48 with IF
cable
control
+
insert IF
C-IF
BB BASE
Modem
BAND 1 1
+VF.o
3V3BB.o
terziary p.s.
MODEM 1
-48 with IF
+VMAIN
SPI_ALIM
to ODU
cable
FI
ODU
filter
FI
FO
ODU
filter
-48V Input
PWR
SB
battery sens.
RL
-48V Input
PWR
battery sens.
SB
RL
ALMBAT.o
PW_SW1/2.i
-VBAT.i
-VBAT.o
+VBAT
-VODU.i
-VODU.o
ALMBAT.o
PW_SW1/2.i
-VBAT.i
-VBAT.o
+VBAT
-VODU.i
-VODU.o
Siemens
SRA 4
Fig. 4.10 Battery protection block diagram (in IDU assembly)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
X
Bytes reserved for

national use (6)
3
2 B1 M
M E1 M
F1 X
3 D1 M
M D2 M
D3
5 B2 B2 B2 K1
K2
6 D4
D5
D6
7 D7
D8
D9
8 D10
D11
D12
9 S1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 M1 E2 X
Bytes for media

specific usage (6)
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.11 SOH Bytes Management
RSOH
POINTER AU
MSOH
Bytes reserved for

future international
standardization (26)
4-25
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 4.12 Equipment Management Architecture

Radio Side
R
F
LCT
SRA 4 management through
TCP/IP DCN networks
Local
Terminal
CPU
LAN
DCN
TCP/IP
Routing Ports
4-26
Remote
Terminal
CPU
NetViewer/
ENMS
F: RS232
Q: 10/100 Base-T
R: SOH byte (S23)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
General Description
5.1
Technical characteristics
In this paragraph the main electrical characteristics, the mechanical characteristics, and the
operating environmental conditions relevant to the SRA 4 equipment are listed.
The values reported in this User manual are the nominal values and cannot be
used as technical specifications.
The guaranteed values are those reported in document Technical Product
Description issued by the MW BPM BLM.
5.1.1
Electrical Characteristics
5.1.1.1
General Electrical Characteristics
SDH frame structure
STM-1
Bit Rate 1xSTM-1
155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Bit Rate 2xSTM-1
2x155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm (Note: the two

STM-1 signals must be synchronous in
the SRA 4 IDU-STM 1 not supported)
STM-1 interface:
electrical
ITU-T G.703
optical
ITU-T G.957 S-1.1
6 GHz RF frequency range (ITU-R):
6L: F.383-7 (5925-6425 MHz)
6U: F.384-7 (6430-7110 MHz)
F.385-6 Annex 1 (7425-7725 MHz)
F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz lower)
F.385-6 Annex 3 (7110-7750 MHz upper)
F.385-6 Annex 4 (7425-7900 MHz)
F.385-6 (f0=7275 MHz) (7125-7425 MHz)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
5-1
SRA 4
Siemens
F.385-6 (f0=7575 MHz) (7425-7725 MHz)
Custom (Finland) (7125-7425 MHz)
F.386-6 (8200-8500 MHz)
F.386-6 Annex 1 (7725-8275 MHz)
ITU-R/OIRT F.386-6 Annex 4 (7900-8400 MHz)
F.386-6 Annex 3 (8200-8500 MHz)
10 GHz RF frequency range (CEPT):
F.387 Recommends 1 (10700-11700 MHz)
F.387 Annex 1 (10700-11700 MHz)
F.387 Annex 2 (10700-11700 MHz)
5-2
CEPT. Rec.12-05 (10000-10680 MHz)
F.497-6 (12750-13750 MHz)
Channelling (128 TCM - 4D):
6L GHz
see par. 2.2.7.1 of UMN 911-381/02C0000
6U GHz (64 or 128 TCM-4D)
see par. 2.2.7.2 of UMN 911-381/02C0000
7 GHz
see par. 2.2.7.3 of UMN 911-381/02C0000
8 GHz
see par. 2.2.7.4 of UMN 911-381/02C0000
10 GHz
see par. 2.2.7.5 of UMN 911-381/02C0000
11 GHz (64 or 128 TCM-4D)
see par. 2.2.7.6 of UMN 911-381/02C0000
13 GHz
see par. 2.2.7.7 of UMN 911-381/02C0000
Shifter frequency:
6L GHz
252 MHz
6U GHz
340 MHz
7 GHz
154/161/168/196/245 MHz
8 GHz
151.614/266/311.32 MHz
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
10 GHz
350 MHz
11 GHz
490/530 MHz
13 GHz
266 MHz
Output connector toward the antenna:
6L GHz
R70 waveguide
6U GHz
R70 waveguide
7 GHz
R84 waveguide
8 GHz
R84 waveguide
10 GHz
R100 waveguide
11 GHz
R100 waveguide
13 GHz
R120 waveguide
Antenna output flange:
6L GHz
UDR 70
6U GHz
UDR 70
7 GHz
UDR 84
8 GHz
UDR 84
10 GHz
UDR 100
11 GHz
UDR 100
13 GHz
UDR 120
System Gain (dB) at points B for 128 TCM (STM-1)
System Gain (dB)

BER < 10-6
BER < 10-8
6U/6L GHz
94
93
7 GHz
94,5
93,5
8 GHz
94
93
10/11 GHz
92,5
91,5
13 GHz
90,5
89,5
System Gain (dB) at points B for 64 TCM ( STM-1)
System Gain (dB)

BER < 10-6
BER < 10-8
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6U GHz
96
95
11 GHz
93
92
5-3
SRA 4
Siemens
Modulation
128 TCM-4D or 64 TCM-4D
Tx intermediate frequency
350 MHz
Rx intermediate frequency
140 MHz
FSK input/output frequency
7 MHz
FSK output/ input frequency
10 MHz
Lightning protection
according to IEC 61000-4-5
Range of temperature with guaranteed

performances
5.1.1.2
-33 C to +55 C (outdoor unit)

-5 C to +50 C (indoor unit)
IDU/ODU Connection Characteristics
Max. IDU/ODU distance:
with Braided 50 ohm coax. cable
190 m
with 1/4 50 ohm coax. cable
250 m
Note: the 1/4 50 ohm coax. cable is delivered on demand.
Modulator output IF level
+5 dBm
ODU output IF level
-16 dBm 2 dB
Software setting
short cable/long cable
According to the type of the cable and to the L lenght a setting must be set via software: short
cable or long cable as explained in the Tab. 5.1.
Tab. 5.1
Short cable/Long cable setting
1/4 coax. cable

short cable
long cable
L 95 m 5 m
L > 95 m 5 m
5.1.1.3
Braided coax. cable

short cable
long cable
L 60 m 5 m
L > 60 m 5 m
Transmitter Characteristics
Note: For the Tx output power of the Hot Standby version, see the Par. 5.1.1.4.
Tab. 5.2
5-4
Max output power
6L/6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
10 GHz
11 GHz
13 GHz
+23 dBm
+23 dBm
+23 dBm
+21 dBm
+21 dBm
+20 dBm
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.3
RF transmitted spectrum
6L
AP:
6U
AP:
7 GHz
AP:
8 GHz
AP:
10 GHz
AP:
11 GHz
AP:
13 GHz
AP:
128 TCM, EN 300 234 EN 301 461 EN 300 234 EN 300 234 EN 300 234 EN 301 461 EN 300 234
CC:
CC:
CC:
CC:
CC:
CC:
1xSTM-1 CC:
EN 301 127 EN 301 461 EN 301 127 EN 301 127 N.A.
64 TCM,
1xSTM-1
CC:
EN 301 461
EN 301 461 EN 301 127
IF frequency
350 MHz 500 kHz
Return losses at the RF output
15 dB
Frequency stability within the

temperature range -33 to +55
5 ppm
5.1.1.4
CC:
EN 301 461
Characteristics of the Transmitter (Hot Standby version)
In the HSBY system consider the following additional loss.
Hot Standby system with balanced coupler (splitter)
Main channel
3.3 dB
Stand-by channel
3.3 dB
Hot Standby system with unbalanced coupler
Main channel
1.5 dB
Stand-by channel
11.5 dB
5.1.1.5
Receiver Characteristics
Range of RF input level within which the IF output is kept at nominal level (-16 dBm 1 dB):
6L GHz
-20 to -85 dBm
6U GHz
-18 to -85 dBm
7 GHz
-18 to -93 dBm
8 GHz
-18 to -93 dBm
10 GHz
-18 to -80 dBm
11 GHz
-18 to -80 dBm
13 GHz
-20 to -85 dBm
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
5-5
SRA 4
Siemens
IF frequency
140 MHz
IF output impedance
50 ohm balanced
5.1.1.6
ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control)
ATPC type
continuous
Max. ATPC range
15 dB 2 dB
Tx max. power
PMIN + ATPC Range
PRx threshold for ATPC intervention:
128 TCM
selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm
64 TCM
selectable via software from -70 to -40 dBm
5.1.1.7
Modemodulator
Tab. 5.4
Modulation Type
Type of modulation
128 TCM-4D + Reed Solomon concatenated coding
64 TCM-4D + Reed Solomon concatenated coding
5.1.1.8
Information bits/symbol
6.5
5.5
Digital Service Channels
F1
1x64 kbit/s (byte F1) V.11 interface (or G.703) (*) (**)
S23
1x64 kbit/s (byte S23) G.703 interface (or V11) (*)
Way Side Traffic (***)
2 Mbit/s G.703 interface (plesiochronous)
(*) If F1 is configured as V.11 S23 must be configured as G.703 or viceversa.

(**) In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only
(***) Available with 2xSTM1 BB/Modem unit only.
5.1.1.9
5-6
Baseband Interfaces
STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s)
electrical
ITU-T G.703
optical
ITU-T G.957 S1.1
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
5.1.1.10
1+1 protection
Type of Dem switching
hitless/errors free
Switching mode
settable revertive/non revertive
The feature errors free means that in the entire switching process no bit errors
shall occur at the STM-1 tributary output, that is:
the switching logic shall switch before any bit error incoming;
during the switching no bit errors should occur;
no pattern loss shall occur in the entire process.

The switch criteria are based on S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) measurements and
not BER estimator.
The Dem switch occurs when there are both the following conditions:
S/N (S/N) threshold
S/N (S/N) protection_flow + hysteresis

where the values of S/N threshold are shown in Tab. 5.5.
Tab. 5.5
Typical Hitless switch thresholds
Modulation
1xSTM-1 128 TCM

1xSTM-1 64 TCM
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
EW-L Thr.
S/N
in
out
28.7 dB 29.4 dB
25.6 dB 26.6 dB
EW-H Thr.
S/N
in
out
26.7 dB 27.5 dB
24.0 dB 24.8 dB
EW-HH Thr.
S/N
in
out
25.5 dB 26.1 dB
21.8 dB 22.6 dB
5-7
SRA 4
Siemens
5.1.1.11
External alarms electrical specifications
Input alarm logic state:
floating --> logic 0 --> normal condition
ground --> logic 1 --> alarm condition
Output alarm logic state:
ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition
open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition
Output telecontrol logic state
ground --> logic 0 --> ON condition
open --> logic 1 --> OFF condition
Note: The logical state associated to the alarm condition at the input (station alarms) is software
programmable.
5.1.1.12
System Power Supply
The power supply meets racc. ETSI EN 300-132-2:
Nominal voltage
-48 Vdc 20 %
5.1.1.13
Power Consumption (from 48 V battery)
Tab. 5.6
Maximum Power consumption (from battery 48 V) with 10% tolerance
IDU 1+0
(1xSTM1)
IDU 1+0
(2xSTM1)
IDU 1+1
(1xSTM1)
IDU 1+1
(2xSTM1)
ODU
5-8
26 W Electrical/27 W Optical
6LGHz
60 W
6U GHz
60 W
7 GHz
60 W
8 GHz
60 W
10 GHz
60 W
11 GHz
60 W
13 GHz
60 W
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
5.1.2
Siemens
Loop-backs
The following 3 loop-backs are available in the IDU on the BB+MODEM unit:
1.
Loop-back 1 (Trib.) - Tributary loop on the STM-1 input/output interface
2.
Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.) - Tributary loop inside the BB+MODEM unit (the signal before
the MODEM section is looped back).
3.
Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.) - Radio loop at the tributary section.
See Fig. 5.1, Fig. 5.2, Fig. 5.3.

All the loopbacks should be set by LCT and TMN.
5.2
Mechanical characteristics
The mechanical characteristics of the indoor equipment are in accordance with the standards
as defined by ETSI (ETS 300 119-3, 4, rack and subrack respectively).
The racks are so dimensioned:
height
2200 mm
width
600 mm
depth
300 mm
The IDU sub-rack has the following dimensions:
standard shelf
2 U (ETSI and 19)
The ODU mechanical characteristics are:
height
width
depth
365 mm
280 mm
180 mm
Weight of modules:
ETSI rack
57 Kg
Indoor Unit (fully equipped)
5 Kg
Outdoor Unit
9 Kg
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
5-9
SRA 4
Siemens
5.2.1
Environmental characteristics
The equipment meets the environmental conditions

Indoor equipment:
Normal conditions: Class 3.2
Temperature limits
-5 to +50C
Humidity limits
5% to 95%
Maximum temperature limit
Up to 55C (without permanent

damages)
Outdoor equipment:
Normal conditions: Class 4.1
Temperature limits
-33 to +55C
Humidity limits
15% to 100%
5.3
RF Channelling
In the following are listed the tables of the channeling foreseen in the available RF bands. In
the tables is present the 3-digit extension P/N of the ODU, which indicates the channel at which
the ODU has been adjusted in factory. In the tables is also present the extension P/N of the
duplexer, because the duplexer is the only unit in the ODU which depends on the frequency
and for this reason is adjusted in factory according to the RF channel.
5-10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
5.3.1
6L GHz channelling
By the LCT the channel frequency can be set at 250 kHz step.
Tab. 5.7
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 1)
GO (MHz)
5945,200
Ext.
P/N
ODU
101
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5974,850
6004,500
6034.150
6063,800
6093,450
6123,100
6152,750
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
Tab. 5.8
2)
Shifter = 252.040 MHz

Duplexer
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
Ext.
P/N
ODU
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
527-703/57
6197,240
6226,890
6256,540
6286,190
6315,840
6345,490
6375,140
6404,790
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/57
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
6L GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.383-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit cod.
GO (MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
5930,375
5960,025
5989,675
6019,325
6048,975
6078,625
Ext.
P/N
ODU
201
202
203
204
205
206
7
8
6108,275
6137,925
207
208
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Shifter = 252.040 MHz

Duplexer
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
201
6182,415
202
6212,065
203
6241,715
204
6271,365
527-703/57
205
6301,015
206
6330,665
Ext.
P/N
ODU
251
252
253
254
255
256
207
208
257
258
6360,315
6389,965
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/57
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
5-11
SRA 4
Siemens
5.3.2
6U GHz channelling
Tab. 5.9
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 MAIN (1 digit cod. 3)

GO
(MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
6460
6500
6540
6580
6620
6660
Ext.
P/N
ODU
301
302
303
304
305
306
7
85
6700
6740
307
308
Tab. 5.10
cod. 4)
Shifter = 340 MHz

Duplexer
Ext. RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
301
6800
302
6840
303
6880
304
6920
527-703/58
305
6960
306
7000
307
308
7040
7080
Ext.
P/N
ODU
351
352
353
354
355
356
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/58
357
358
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
6U GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.384-7 INTERLEAVED (1 digit

Shifter = 340 MHz
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
85
5-12
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
6440
6480
6520
6560
6600
6640
6680
6720
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/58
Ext. RETURN Ext.

P/N
(MHz)
P/N
Dupl.
ODU
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
6780
6820
6860
6920
6940
6980
7020
7060
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
Duplexer
P/N
527-703/58
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
5.3.3
7 GHz channelling
Tab. 5.11
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 Annex 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 1)
High
=
7597
GO
(MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
Low
=
7297
GO
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
1
2
3
4
5
7121
7149
7177
7205
7233
101
102
103
104
105
Tab. 5.12
7457
7485
7513
7541
7569
Ext.
P/N
ODU
106
107
108
109
110
7442
7470
7498
7526
7554
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/26
527-725/27
Ext.
P/N
ODU
156
157
158
159
160
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
RETURN
(MHz)
Ext.
P/N
ODU
101
102
103
104
105
7317
7345
7373
7401
7429
151
152
153
154
155
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/26
527-705/27
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
106
107
108
109
110
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
101
102
103
104
105
GO
(MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
Shifter = 168 MHz

Duplexer
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
106
7625
107
7653
527-705/35
108
7681
109
7709
110
7737
Shifter = 196 MHz
Ext.
P/N
ODU
201
202
203
204
205
Shifter = 154 MHz

Duplexer Ext. P/ RETURN
P/N
N Du(MHz)
pl.
201
7596
202
7624
527-705/35
203
7652
204
7680
205
7708
Ext.
P/N
ODU
251
252
253
254
255
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
201
202
203
204
205
5-13
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.13
7 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.385-6 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3)
(F0=7575)
GO
(MHz)
5-14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7428
7435
7442
7449
7456
7463
Ext.
P/N
ODU
321
322
323
324
352
326
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
7470
7477
7484
7491
7498
7505
7512
7519
7526
7533
7540
7547
7554
7561
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Shifter = 161 MHz

Ext. P/ RETURN Ext.
N Du(MHz)
P/N
pl.
ODU
321
7589
371
322
7596
372
323
7603
373
324
7610
374
352
7617
375
326
7624
376
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
7631
7638
7645
7652
7659
7666
7673
7680
7687
7694
7701
7708
7715
7722
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Tab. 5.14
Siemens
(F0=7275)
GO
(MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7128
7135
7142
7149
7156
7163
Ext.
P/N
ODU
301
302
303
304
305
306
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
7170
7177
7184
7191
7198
7205
7212
7219
7226
7233
7240
7247
7254
7261
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/26
527-705/31
Shifter = 161 MHz

Ext. RETURN Ext.
P/N
(MHz)
P/N
Dupl.
ODU
301
7289
351
302
7296
352
303
7303
353
304
7310
354
305
7317
355
306
7324
356
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
7331
7338
7345
7352
7359
7366
7373
7380
7387
7394
7401
7408
7415
7422
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/26
527-705/31
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
5-15
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.15
GO
(MHz)
5-16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7442
7470
7498
7526
7554
7582
Ext.
P/N
ODU
401
402
403
404
405
406
7
8
7610
7638
407
408
Shifter = 245 MHz

Duplexer
Ext.
RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
Dupl.
401
7687
527-705/35
402
7715
403
7743
527-705/36
404
7771
405
7799
406
7827
527-705/38
407
408
7855
7883
Ext.
P/N
ODU
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
Duplexer
P/N
527-705/35
527-705/36
527-705/38
Ext.
P/N
Dupl.
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
5.3.4
8 GHz channelling
In the 8 GHz range, some channels have frequencies and shifter that are not
integral multiple values of 250 kHz (minimum resolution allowed by the ODU
configuration software).
In these cases, the ODUs are configured by means of the values reported in bold
and between brackets in the following tables.
Then, the parameters can be different from those defined by the ITU-R
channelling but, considering the frequency stability of the 8 GHz ODU, the EN300-234 reference normative is however respected.
Tab. 5.16
P/N = 1)
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 MAIN (1st digit ext.
Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz)
GO (MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7747.700
(7747.750)
7777.350
(7777.500)
7807.000
(7807.000)
7836.650
(7836.750)
7866.300
(7866.250)
7895.950
(7896.000)
7925.600
(7925.750)
7955.250
(7955.250)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Ext. Duplexer P/N Ext.

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
101
101
102
102
527-705/62
103
103
104
104
105
527-705/66
106
107
108
105
106
527-705/67
107
108
RETURN
(MHz)
8059.020
(8059.000)
8088.670
(8088.750)
8118.320
(8118.250)
8147.970
(8148.000)
8177.620
(8177.500)
8207.270
(8207.250)
8236.920
(8237.000)
8266.570
(8266.500)

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
151
101
152
102
527-705/62
153
103
154
104
155
527-705/66
156
157
158
105
106
527-705/67
107
108
5-17
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.17
8 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1 INTERLEAVED
(1st digit ext. P/N = 2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5-18
Shifter = 311.320 MHz (311.250 MHz)

GO (MHz) Ext. Duplexer P/N Ext. RETURN Ext. Duplexer P/N Ext.
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
ODU
Dupl.
7732.875
8044.195
201
201
251
201
(7733.000)
(8044.250)
7762.525
(7762.500)
7792.175
(7792.250)
7821.825
(7821.750)
7851.475
(7851.500)
7881.125
(7881.250)
7910.775
(7910.750)
7940.425
(7940.500)
202
203
202
527-705/62
203
204
204
205
205
206
206
207
208
527-705/67
207
208
8073.845
(8073.750)
8103.495
(8103.500)
8133.145
(8133.000)
8162.795
(8162.750)
8192.445
(8192.500)
8222.095
(8222.000)
8251.745
(8251.750)
252
253
202
527-705/62
203
254
204
255
205
256
206
257
258
527-705/67
207
208
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.18
8 GHz channelling according to OIRT/ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7926
7954
7982
8010
8038
8066
Shifter = 266 MHz

Ext. Duplexer P/N Ext. RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
301
301
8192
302
302
8220
527-705/67
303
303
8248
304
304
8276
305
305
8304
527-705/70
306
306
8332
7
8
8094
8122
307
308
GO (MHz)
Tab. 5.19
527-705/71
307
308
8360
8388

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
351
301
352
302
527-705/67
353
303
354
304
355
305
527-705/70
356
306
357
358
527-705/71
307
308

Shifter = 151.614 MHz (151.500 MHz)
GO (MHz)
1
3
5
7
9
11
8210.048
(8210.000)
8233.372
(8233.500)
8256.696
(8256.750)
8280.020
(8280.000)
8303.344
(8303.500)
8326.668
(8326.750)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
401
401
403
403
405
405
527-705/73
407
407
409
409
411
411
RETURN
(MHz)
8361.662
(8361.500)
8384.986
(8385.000)
8408.310
(8408.250)
8431.634
(8431.500)
8454.958
(8455.000)
8478.282
(8478.250)

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
451
401
453
403
455
405
527-705/73
457
407
459
409
461
411
5-19
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.20
GO
Ext. P/N
(MHz)
ODU
1
8293
001
8307
002
8321
003
8335
004
8349
005
8363
006
Shifter = 119 MHz

Duplexer Ext. P/ RETURN Ext. P/N
P/N
N Dupl.
(MHz)
ODU
527-705/73
527-705/74
001
8412
051
002
8426
052
003
8440
053
004
8454
054
005
8468
055
006
8482
056
5.3.5
10 GHz channelling
Tab. 5.21
10 GHz channelling according to CEPT.Rec 12-05
Duplexer
P/N
Ext. P/N
Dupl.
001
527-705/73
002
003
004
527-705/74
005
006
CEPT.Rec 12-05 (Shifter = 350 MHz - 1 digit cod. 1)

ext ODU=100 => TF-MIN=10008 MHz;
TF_MAX=10160 MHz
TF_MAX=10510 MHz
GO Ext. P/N Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N GO (MHz) Ext. P/N Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
ODU
Dupl.
1
10028
100
10378
150
10056
100
10406
150
10084
100
10434
150
10112
100
10462
150
10140
100
10490
150
527-904/92
001
527-904/92
001

TF_MAX=10300 MHz
TF_MAX=10650 MHz
GO Ext. P/N Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N GO (MHz) Ext. P/N Duplexer P/N Ext. P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
ODU
Dupl.
5-20
10168
101
10518
151
10196
101
10546
151
10224
101
10574
151
10252
101
10602
151
10280
101
10630
151
527-904/92
002
527-904/92
002
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
5.3.6
11 GHz channelling
Tab. 5.22
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Main
10715
Shifter = 530 MHz

P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
110
007
11245
2
3
4
5
6
10755
10795
10835
10875
10915
110
110
110
110
110
7
8
9
10
11
12
10955
10995
11035
11075
11115
11155
111
111
111
111
111
111
GO (MHz)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
527-904/84
527-904/84

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
160
007
007
007
007
007
007
11285
11325
11365
11405
11445
160
160
160
160
160
008
008
008
008
008
008
11485
11525
11565
11605
11645
11685
161
161
161
161
161
161
527-904/84
527-904/84
007
007
007
007
007
008
008
008
008
008
008
5-21
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.23
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1 Interleaved/
Annex 1 (1st digit ext. P/N = 2)
1 (*)
2
3
4
5
6
10695
10735
10775
10815
10855
10895
Shifter = 530 MHz

P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
210
009
11225
210
009
11265
210
009
11305
527-904/84
210
009
11345
210
009
11385
210
009
11425
7
8
9
10
11
12
10935
10975
11015
11055
11095
11135
211
211
211
211
211
211
GO (MHz)
527-904/84
010
010
010
010
010
010
11465
11505
11545
11585
11625
11665

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
260
009
260
009
260
009
527-904/84
260
009
260
009
260
009
261
261
261
261
261
261
527-904/84
010
010
010
010
010
0010
(*) Not available for Annex 1
5-22
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 5.24
11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Annex 2/CEPT 12-06
Recommends 3 (1st digit ext. P/N = 3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Shifter = 490 MHz

GO (MHz) Ext. Duplexer P/N Ext. RETURN
P/N
P/N
(MHz)
ODU
Dupl.
10735
310
011
11225
10775
310
011
11265
10815
310
011
11305
527-904/84
10855
310
011
11345
10895
310
011
11385
10935
310
011
11425
7
8
9
10
11
12
10975
11015
11055
11095
11135
11175
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
311
311
311
311
311
311
527-904/84
012
012
012
012
012
012
11465
11505
11545
11585
11625
11665

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
360
011
360
011
360
011
527-904/84
360
011
360
011
360
011
361
361
361
361
361
361
527-904/84
012
012
012
012
012
012
5-23
SRA 4
Siemens
5.3.7
13 GHz channelling
Tab. 5.25
13 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.497-6 Main (Interleaved)
(1 digit ext. P/N = 1)
Shifter = 266 MHz
GO (MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12765
(12779)
12793
(12807)
12821
(12835)
12849
(12863)
12877
(12891)
12905
(12919)
12933
(12947)
12961
(12975)

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
100
527-904/74
001
100
001
100
001
100
001
101
527-904/74
002
101
002
101
002
101
002
RETURN
(MHz)
13031
(13045)
13059
(13073)
13087
(13101)
13115
(13129)
13143
(13157)
13171
(13185)
13199
(13213)
13227
(13241)

P/N
P/N
ODU
Dupl.
150
527-904/74
001
150
001
150
001
150
001
151
527-904/74
002
151
002
151
002
151
002
Note: between brackets the interleaved channelling is shown.
5-24
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 5.1
Siemens
Loop-back 1 (Trib.)
I/O
INTERFACE
BB
SECTION
MODEM
SECTION
STM-1
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
5-25
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 5.2
Loop-back 2 (Trib. side int.)

I/O
INTERFACE
BB
SECTION
MODEM
SECTION
STM-1
5-26
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 5.3
Siemens
Loop-back 3 (Radio ext.)

I/O
INTERFACE
BB
SECTION
MODEM
SECTION
STM-1
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
5-27
Siemens
5-28
SRA 4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
The equipment configurations available are the following:

Tab. 6.1
System configurations
Configuration
1+0
(Note 3)
1+1 HSBY
2+0 DP
or
1+1 DP
(Note 3)
Denomination
1+0 system with independent antenna (Note 1)
Ref. to Figure
Fig. 6.1
1+1 system with Hot Standby (Note 2)

2+0 system with dual polarization with adjacent channels or 1+1 system with dual polarization with adjacent
channels (Note 1)
Fig. 6.2
Fig. 6.3
1+1 FD
(Note 3)
2+0 CC
(Note 4)
2x(1+1) FD CC
(Note 4)
2x(1+1) FD CC
(Note 4)
2x(1+1) HSBY
CC
(Note 4)
N+1
(2+1/3+1)
(Note 4)
1+1 system heterofrequency copolar (with circulator)

(Note 1)
2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration
2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel configuration ( with one antenna)
2x(1+1) system with dual polarization co-channel configuration ( with two antennas)
2x(1+1) Hot Standby system with dual polarization
co-channel configuration
Fig. 6.4
N+1 system with Alternate Pattern (AP)
Fig. 6.9
Fig. 6.10
Fig. 6.5
Fig. 6.6
Fig. 6.7
Fig. 6.8
Note 1: The waveguide connection between ODU and antenna can be flexible or elliptical type.
Note 2: The coupler can be balanced or unbalanced type.
Note 3: Configuration with SRA 4 IDU and SRA 4 IDU-STM1.
Note 4: Configuration with SRA 4 IDU only.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-1
SRA 4
Siemens
6.1
Equipment composition
Tab. 6.2 below shows the composition of the equipment (P/N. 802-300/12) and it is used to
transmit in all the available bands.
The AP system can be used in the following configurations:
1+0
1+1 HSBY
1+1
2+0
N+1
The CC system can be used in the following configurations:
2+0
2x(1+1) FD
2x(1+1) Hot Standby.
Tab. 6.2
SRA equipment composition

Outdoor Assembly
Indoor Assembly
Equipment
STM-1 AP
systems
(64 or 128
TCM-4D)
STM-1 CC
systems
(64 or 128
TCM-4D)
ETSI
Rack P/N
IDU
Assembly
P/N
6 GHz
P/N
(6L)
735-211/06B
627-65/002
702-300/12
(6U)
735-211/06C
7 GHz
P/N
8 GHz
P/N
10 GHz
P/N
11 GHz
P/N
13 GHz
P/N
735-201/07
or
735-211/07
735-201/08
735-201/11 735-201/13
or
735-201/10
or
or
735-211/08
735-211/11 735-211/13
735-211/07
735-211/08
(6L)
735-211/06B
627-65/002
702-300/12
735-211/11 735-211/13
(6U)
735-211/06C
Note: The 64 TCM-4D modulation is available in the 6U and 11 GHz bands.
6-2
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
6.1.1
Siemens
Indoor assembly composition
The indoor assembly consists of:
an ETSI wired rack;
one IDU assembly in 1+0/1+1/2+0 configuration (refer to Fig. 6.11 ) or two IDU assembly
in N+1 configuration (refer to Fig. 6.12) or 2x(1+1) (refer to Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14), and
one External EOW optional assembly P/N 705-102/01 (refer to Fig. 6.11, Fig. 6.12,
Fig. 6.13 and Fig. 6.14).
6.1.2
Outdoor assembly composition (ODU)
ODU is available in 2 versions:
ODU AP for AP channelling (Fig. 6.15). These ODUs are installed on the supporting frames of Par. 6.1.5.
ODU AP/CC for AP and CC channelling (Fig. 6.16). These ODUs are installed on the supporting frames of Par. 6.1.5.
6.1.3
IDU/ODU cable
Two different types of cable can be used:
Braided 50 ohm coaxial cable
refer to par. 2.3.5.1 of UMN Manual 911-382/02C0000
1/4 50 ohm coaxial cable
refer to par. 2.3.5.2 of UMN Manual 911-382/02C0000
The standard delivery includes the Braided coaxial cable and the max. length of the IDU/ODU
connection is 190 m.
The 1/4 coaxial cable is delivered on demand and the max. length of the IDU/ODU connection
is 250 m.
See Fig. 6.17.
6.1.4
ODU coaxial connections for the CO-CHANNEL
Cable connections between two ODU's must be realised only when the equipment is CC configured: 2+0 CC or 2x(1+1) FD CC or 2x(1+1) HSBY CC.
6.1.4.1
2+0 CC configuration connections
The connections must be made as specified in Fig. 6.18.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-3
SRA 4
Siemens
6.1.4.2
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with one antenna)

6.1.4.3
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration connections (with two antennas)

6.1.4.4
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration connections
6.1.5
Supporting frames (AP and AP/CC ODU)
6.1.5.1
1+0 Supporting frame
Refer to Fig. 6.22 .

The 1+0 supporting frame consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the Outdoor Unit in 1+0 configuration.
From an electrical point of view the frame is a passive device (i.e. waveguide section) that provides interconnection between its two ports with negligible insertion loss.
6.1.5.2
1+1 Supporting frames for Hot Stand-by
Balanced frame
Refer to Fig. 6.23.
The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant
waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two Outdoor Units in 1+1
HSBY (Hot Stand-by) balanced configuration.
From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for balanced configuration is a 1:1 coupler. The
signal incoming from the antenna port is split balanced-wise toward the two ODUs.
Unbalanced frame
Refer to Fig. 6.24.
The 1+1 supporting frame for Hot Stand-by consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant
waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of the two Outdoor Units in 1+1
HSBY (Hot Stand-by) unbalanced configuration.
From an electrical point of view the 1+1 frame for unbalanced configuration is a 10:1 coupler.
The signal incoming from the antenna port is split unbalanced-wise the two ODUs.
6-4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
1+1 Supporting frame for Frequency Diversity

Refer to Fig. 6.25.
The 1+1 supporting frame from frequency diversity consists of a mechanical structure, and relevant waveguide accessories, suitable for pole or wall mounting of two Outdoor Units in 1+1
Frequency Diversity configuration.
The two ODUs are interconnected to the antenna port through a circulator. Both the ODUs
transmit at the same time, delivering the signal on two RF channels at different frequencies on
the same polarisation (Co-polar) or on different polarisation (Cross-polar).
6.1.5.3
Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (6U/6L,
7 and 8 GHz)
Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)

Refer to Fig. 6.26.
The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames:
one 1+0 supporting frame.
one 1+1 supporting frame for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar).

Refer to Fig. 6.27.
The 3+1 configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar).
6.1.5.4
Supporting frames for N+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP) (10, 11
and 13 GHz)

Refer to Fig. 6.28.
The 2+1 configuration needs two supporting frames as follow:
one 1+0 supporting frame.
one 1+1 balanced supporting frame.

Refer to Fig. 6.29.
The 3+1 configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same used for
Hot-Standby).
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-5
SRA 4
Siemens
6.1.5.5
Supporting frames for Co-Channel FD configuration
Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration

Refer to Fig. 6.30.
The 2+0 configuration needs two 1+0 supporting frames.
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) - ODU
6L/6U, 7 and 8 GHz
Refer to Fig. 6.31.
The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Co-polar).
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one antenna) - ODU
11 GHz and 13 GHz
Refer to Fig. 6.32
The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 balanced supporting frames (the same used for
Hot-Standby)
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two antennas)
Refer to Fig. 6.33.
The 2x(1+1) configuration need two supporting frames for Frequency Diversity (Cross-polar).
6.1.5.6
Supporting frames for Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration
Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration - ODU 6, 7, 8, 11

and 13 GHz
Refer to Fig. 6.34.
The 2x(1+1) configuration needs two 1+1 unbalanced supporting frames.
6-6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 6.1
Siemens
1+0 system with independent antenna
FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
VERTICAL 1+0 SUPPORT
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON THE RACK

OF COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-7
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.2
1+1 system with Hot Standby

FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
ODU
AP or AP/CC
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)
6-8
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.3
2+0 system with dual polarization
FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE

FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
ODU
AP or AP/CC
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-9
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.4
1+1 system copolar

FLEXIBLE
WAVE GUIDE
ODU
AP or AP/CC
ODU
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
ETSI RACK (19)
6-10
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.5
2+0 system with dual polarization co-channel configuration
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
AP/CC ODU
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
IDU
E OW
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-11
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.6
2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with one antenna)
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 co-polar)
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 co-polar)
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) V-pol.

2nd IDU (1+1) H-pol.
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)
6-12
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.7 2x(1+1) FD with dual polarization co-channel configuration (with two
antennas)
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
IF LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 cross-polar)
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL
CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 cross-polar)
IF LO SYNCH CO-CHANNEL
CABLE
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) V-H pol.

2nd IDU (1+1) H-V pol.
ETSI RACK (19)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
6-13
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.8
2x(1+1) Hot Standby with dual polarization co-channel configuration
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 HSBY)
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
AP/CC ODU
IF LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
ODU SUPPORT
(1+1 HSBY)
AP/CC ODU
RF-LO SYNCH
CO-CHANNEL CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
1st IDU (1+1) HSBY V-pol.

2nd IDU (1+1) HSBY H-pol.
ETSI RACK (19)
6-14
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.9
N+1 (2+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
ELLIPTICAL
WAVE GUIDES
ELLIPTICAL
WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.1)
AP or AP/CC
ODU (ST.BY)
APor AP/CC
ELLIPTICAL
WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.2)
AP or AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1)
EXP IDU (CH. 2)
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
ETSI RACK (19)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-15
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.10 N+1 (3+1) system with Alternate Pattern (AP) configuration
ELLIPTICAL WAVE
GUIDES
ELLIPTICAL WAVE
GUIDE
ODU (CH.1)
AP or AP/CC
ODU (ST.BY)
APor AP/CC
ELLIPTICAL
WAVE GUIDE
ODU (CH.2)
AP or AP/CC
ODU (CH.2)
APor AP/CC
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING ON RACK OF
COAXIAL CABLE
MAIN IDU (STBY + CH. 1)
EXP IDU (CH. 2 + CH.3)
ETSI RACK (19)
6-16
External EOW
(OPTIONAL)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.11 1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly
SRA4 IDU
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
SRA4 IDU-STM1
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-17
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.12 N+1 Indoor assembly

2+1 CONFIGURATION
IDU MAIN
UNIT
IDU EXT
UNIT
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
3+1 CONFIGURATION
IDU MAIN
UNIT
IDU EXT
UNIT
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
6-18
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.13 2x(1+1) FD CC Indoor assembly

2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION
1st (1+1) IDU assembly

CH1+CH2 V-pol.
2nd (1+1) IDU assembly

CH1+CH2 H-pol.
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-19
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.14 2x(1+1) HOT-STANDBY CC Indoor assembly

2x(1+1) CONFIGURATION
1st (1+1) IDU assembly

Main+Stby V-pol.
2nd (1+1) IDU assembly

Main+Stby H-pol.
External EOW
Assembly (optional)
P/N 705-102/01
WIRED RACK
P/N 627-65/002
6-20
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.15 Outdoor assembly (AP)

FRONT VIEW
FEEDER FLANGE
RX FIELD
MEASUREMENT
CONNECTOR
PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(factory use)
GROUND CABLE
IN/OUT IF CABLE
CONNECTOR
TOP VIEW
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
BOTTOM VIEW
6-21
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.16 Outdoor assembly (AP/CC )

FEEDER FLANGE
367
FRONT VIEW
RX FIELD
MEASUREMENT
CONNECTOR
PC INTERFACE
CONNECTOR
(factory use)
GROUND CABLE
CONNECTION POINT
202
RF LO CO-CHANNEL
CONNECTOR
324
RF LO CO-CHANNEL
CONNECTOR
TOP VIEW
IN/OUT IF CABLE
CONNECTOR
BOTTOM VIEW
In the 6 GHz ODU connector IF LO CO-CHANNEL is not used,

because in Rx side the conversion is directly from RF to 140 MHz.
6-22
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.17 Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable
(a)
OSM/N COAXIAL TAIL

(L.=1 Mt.)
(314-327/91)
TO ODU
SECTION
Braided or 1/4
COAXIAL CABLE
COAXIAL N-PLUG
COAXIAL CABLE
FIXING BRACKET
(b)
(232-124/20)
(a)
OSM/N COAXIAL TAIL

(L.=1 Mt.)
(314-327/91)
TO IDU
SECTION
(a) = This material is included in the base connection elements (1+0) 597-525/21, (1+1) 597-525/22 or
(1+0>1+1) 597-525/33.
(b) = This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element
597-525/21 and 597-525/22.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-23
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.18 Connection diagram between the AP/CC ODUs for CC configuration
FLEX WG
FLEX WG
ODU 1
V
H
ODU 2
RF LO COAX CABLE
RF LO Conn.
IF LO Conn.
IF
COAX CABLE
TO/FROM
IDU
RF LO Conn.
IF LO COAX CABLE
(Note)
IF LO Conn.
IF
COAX CABLE
TO/FROM
IDU
Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz AP/CC ODU.
6-24
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.19 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration ( 2x(1+1) FD with
one antenna
Flexible W.G.
ODU 3
(CH1)
ODU 1
(CH1)
V pol.
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
H pol.
RF LO
Conn.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
RF
HYBRID
V
H
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
ODU 2
(CH2)
V pol.
IF
Coax
Cable
RF
HYBRID
Flexible W.G.
ODU 4
(CH2)
H pol.
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
1st IDU
(1+1)
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
2nd IDU
(1+1)
Note: This connection is not implemented in the 6 GHz ODU.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-25
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.20 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration ( 2x(1+1) FD with
two antennas)
Flexible W.G.
1st System
V
H
Flexible W.G.
ODU 3
(CH1)
ODU 1
(CH1)
V-pol.
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
RF LO
Conn.
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (note)
IF LO
Conn.
H-pol.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
Flexible W.G.
2nd System
H
V
Flexible W.G.
ODU 3
(CH1)
ODU 2
(CH1)
H-pol.
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
RF LO
Conn.
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (note)
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
V-pol.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
1st IDU
(1+1)
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
2nd IDU
(1+1)
6-26
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.21 Connection diagram between the ODUs for CC configuration (2x(1+1) Hot
Standby)
Flexible W.G.
V
H
ODU 3
(MAIN
ODU 1
(MAIN)
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
V pol.
H pol.
RF LO
Conn.
RF LO
Conn.
IF LO
Conn.
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF LO
Conn.
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
RF
COUPLER
ODU 2
(STBY)
V pol.
Flexible W.G.
RF
COUPLER
ODU 4
(CH2)
STBY
RF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable
IF Loc. Osc.
coax. cable (Note)
IF
Coax
Cable
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
1st IDU
(1+1)
BB.1
XPIC
Connections
BB.2
XPIC
Connections
IF
Coax
Cable
IF
Coax
Cable
2nd IDU
(1+1)
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
6-27
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.22 1+0 Supporting frame

POLE 115
1+0 FRAME
ODU
ODU
waveguide
6-28
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-114/06
534-114/07
Frame
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/10
10
AP
10.0 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.23 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot Standby (Balanced frame)
POLE 115
1+1 FRAME
ODU
ODU
ODU
A
C
Hybrid
ODU
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-113/06
534-113/07
Frame
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-113/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-113/10
10
AP
10.0 - 11.7 WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7 WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3 WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Nominal
coupling
attenuation (dB)
3.6
6-29
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.24 1+1 Supporting frame for Hot Standby (Unbalanced frame)
POLE 115
1+1 FRAME
ODU
ODU
ODU
A
C
Coupler
ODU
6-30
Frame
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
534-112/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-112/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/10
10
AP
10.0 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-112/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-112/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
Nominal coupling
attenuation (dB)
MAIN
ST.BY
1
10
1.1
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.25 1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity

B
Co-polar
ODU
A
C
Circulator
ODU
Frame
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
ODU
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
Nominal
coupling
attenuation C-A
B-A
(dB)
3.6
Cross-polar
B
A1
A2
C
ODU
Frame
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-116/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-116/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-116/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Ports A1, A2 Ports B, C

Flange
Flange
type
type
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
(dB)
0.1
6-31
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.26 Supporting frames for 2+1 configuration with Alternate Pattern (AP)
1+1 FD co-polar frame
1 ODU
st
B
Frame
Circulator
2nd ODU
1+0 frame
B
3th ODU
waveguide

Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-114/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5,6 - 7,1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-114/07
AP or AP/CC
7,1 - 7,9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/07
AP or AP/CC
8,2 - 8,5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Co-polar)
6-32
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
UDR70
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
UDR84
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
UDR84
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B, C
Flange
type
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
C-A B-A (dB)
3.6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
1 ODU
st
2nd ODU
Frame
Circulator
3th ODU
B
Circulator
4th ODU

Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-115/07
AP or AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
C-A B-A (dB)
3.6
6-33
SRA 4
Siemens
C
1+1 Balanced supporting frame
1st ODU
B
Frame
Hybrid
2nd ODU
1+0 supporting frame

B
3th ODU
waveguide

Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-114/10
10
AP
10,0 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
6-34
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-113/10
10
AP
10,0 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange type
Port B,C
Flange type
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
C-A B-A (dB)
3.6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
C
1st ODU
B
Hybrid
2nd ODU
C
Frame
3th ODU
B
Hybrid
4th ODU

Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range (GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange type
Port B,C
Flange type
534-113/10
10
AP
10,0 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/11
11
AP or AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP or AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
(dB)
3.6
6-35
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.30 Supporting frames for (2+0) Co-Channel FD configuration

A
ODU
Frame
waveguide

B
ODU
waveguide
6-36
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B
Flange
type
534-114/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5,6 - 7,1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-114/07
AP/CC
7,1 - 7,9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/07
AP/CC
8,2 - 8,5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-114/11
11
AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-114/13
13
AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.31 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one
antenna)
C
1 ODU
st
2nd ODU
Frame
Circulator
3th ODU
B
Circulator
4th ODU

Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-115/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6-7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-115/07
AP/CC
7.1-7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-115/07
AP/CC
8.2-8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
Guide type
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
C-A B-A (dB)
3.6
6-37
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.32 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with one
antenna)
C
1st ODU
B
Hybrid
2nd ODU
C
Frame
3th ODU
B
Hybrid
4th ODU
6-38
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range (GHz)
W.G.
Type
Port A
Flange type
Port B,C
Flange type
534-113/11
11
AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-113/13
13
AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
C-A B-A (dB)
3.6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.33 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel FD configuration (with two
antennas)
1st ODU
B
A1
1+1 FD
cross-polar
frame
A2
C
3th ODU
2nd ODU
B
A1
1+1 FD
cross-polar
frame
A2
C
4th ODU
Frame
1+1 Supporting frame for frequency diversity (Cross-polar)

Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
534-116/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5,6 - 7,1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-116/07
AP/CC
7,1 - 7,9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/07
AP/CC
8,2 - 8,5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-116/11
11
AP/CC
10,7 - 11,7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-116/13
13
AP/CC
12,7 - 13,3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
Ports A1, A2
Flange
type
Ports B, C
Flange
type
Nominal
coupling
attenuation
(dB)
0.1
6-39
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 6.34 Supporting frames for 2x(1+1) Co-Channel Hot Standby configuration
B
1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame
1st ODU
C
Coupler
2nd ODU
B
Frame
1+1 Unbalanced supporting frame
3th ODU
C
Coupler
4th ODU
1+1 Supporting unbalanced frame for Hot Standby
6-40
Code
Freq.
Band
(GHz)
ODU
TYPE
Freq.
Range
(GHz)
W.G.
Type
534-112/06
6L/6U
AP/CC
5.6 - 7.1
WR137 R70
UDR70
PDR70
534-112/07
AP/CC
7.1 - 7.9
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/07
AP/CC
8.2 - 8.5
WR112 R84
UDR84
PDR84
534-112/11
11
AP/CC
10.7 - 11.7
WR90 R100
UDR100
PDR100
534-112/13
13
AP/CC
12.7 - 13.3
WR75 R120
UDR120
PDR120
Port A
Flange
type
Port B,C
Flange
type
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
System Protection
7.1
1+1 protection
SRA 4 implements a very flexible and effecting switching platform.

The switching system protects traffic from any possible anomalous conditions:
HW faults
Tributary and RF loss of signal
CPU controller faults
The complete path from the source to the final destination can be effectively protected. SRA 4
provides the tributary protection. The same signal (Overhead and Payload) is available on both
the tributary interfaces protecting the traffic even by possible tributary loss of signal.
Hot Standby, Frequency Diversity with Single or Double tributary interface options allow users
to implement their own protection requirements just selecting the most suitable system set-up.
Fig. 7.1 shows the 1+1 configuration without the tributary protection (STI).
Fig. 7.2 shows the 1+1 configuration with the tributary protection (DTI).
Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch)
Tab. 7.1
Switching criteria in the Tx Switch (Trib. Switch)
Switching Criteria
Switch Type
Los Tx
Lof Tx
TIM Tx
TX PLL clock
Unrevertive
RX PLL clock
Ref clock
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
7-1
SRA 4
Siemens
Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch)
Type of Dem switching:
Hitless/errors free
Switching mode "Revertive / non revertive" (SW settable)
Tab. 7.2
Switching criteria in the Rx Switch (Dem. Switch)
ALARM
PRIORITY
Note
Demodulator Alarm
Demodulator Alarm covers the entire HW RX chain
RADIO LOF
LOF SDH in 1xSTM-1 case
SDH LOF (in BB)
LOF SDH of each STM-1 in 2xSTM-1 case
BB Card Fail
EXCESSIVE BER
BER approx. in the range 10^-4 and 10^-6
HIGH BER
LOW BER
In the revertive mode the main channel (with higher priority) is always selected not only if it has
a better quality than the secondary channel (having a lower priority) but also if it has an equal
one.
In the unrevertive mode there isn't a real main channel, so when the protection channel is on
line there is no switching when the main channel becomes normal again (and viceversa).
Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch
Tab. 7.3
Switching criteria in the ODU Hot Stand-by Switch
Switching Criteria
Switch Type
Mod Fail
IF Cable
FSK_ALM _UP
Odu TX ALM
Unrevertive
Odu PS Alm
ODU uP ALM
7-2
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
7.1.1
Siemens
N+1 protection (with SRA 4 IDU only)
Two IDUs (MAIN and EXT) are required and they are interconnected with two different cables:
E-link cable between the two controller cards and B-link cable between the upper BB-modem
boards (physical board 1) of the two IDUs.
2+1 system configuration is equal to 3+1 system configuration, with the exception of the fourth
BB-modem card (physical card 2 of IDU EXT), which is not equipped in 2+1 system type.
BB-modem cards 1, 2 and 3 (corresponding respectively to physical card 2 of IDU 1, card 1 of
IDU 2 and card 2 of IDU 2) support tributary signals and radio protected channel 1, 2 and 3
respectively. BB-modem card S (corresponding to card 1 of IDU 1) supports radio stand-by
channel (protecting channel); "occasional" tributary signals (signals to be transmitted on the
protecting channel when no protection requests are present) are not foreseen.
Fig. 7.4 and Fig. 7.5 show a block diagram relevant to the Tx section and Rx section respectively.
"Expansion" IDU controller card is mainly used for switching management purposes (RS controller functionality): it manages the radio alarms and the card fail alarms received from the NE
controller; it exchanges messages (via SCS channels) with the peer RS Controller housed in
the remote station and configures all the switches according to the switching priorities and configurations received from the NE controller (user configurations).
"Expansion" IDU alarm restitution unit is not used.
Physical channels used inside the NE to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type are
depicted in Fig. 7.3. The same channels are used in 2+1 system type, with the difference that
BB-modem 3 is not equipped (corresponding channels are not supported and corresponding
alarms are not managed).
The protection channel may be used to protect, at the same time, different protected channels
in the two directions (for example, channel 1 from the local station to the remote one and channel 3 from the remote station to the local one).
Local RS Controller sends switching requirements to the remote one according to local alarms
of the receiving sections, then the remote RS Controller can decide to use the protecting channel to transmit the requested tributary signal(s) according to the received requirements or not
to use it according to its local alarms (more explanations are given in the following).
The switching is of hitless type.
NE Controller behaviour
The "main" IDU controller is the NE controller. It manages all the NE configurations and transmits the alarms to the EMS (Element Manager System). A specific behaviour is required in
double IDU configurations as detailed in this paragraph.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
7-3
Siemens
SRA 4
When a configuration change is required from LCT/EMS, it checks if the "expansion" IDU is involved:
if it is not involved, it behaves like a NE controller of a single IDU based system type;
if the "expansion" IDU is involved, it accepts the configuration only if the "expansion" controller accepts the configuration too.
Accepted configurations are saved both in controller's non volatile memory and into Configuration Memory key.
NE Controller also verifies that switching configurations (priorities, forcing, and so on) can be
accepted.
BB Card Equipping and Configuration
It is possible to have different tributary interfaces (electrical and optical ones) for the different
BB-modem cards equipping a NE.
All the BB-modem cards must be configured with the same tributary capacity (STM-1 or
2xSTM-1) and with the same modulation format.
Auxiliary Channels
Every BB-modem card supporting a protected channel can support the following Auxiliary (also
known as Service) Channels:
one 2 Mb/s way-side channel;
one 64 kbit/s user channel, with selectable interface (G.703 or V.11).

One byte only (F1 byte) is always available in STM-1 frame in N+1 system types,
so just one 64 kbit/s user channel can be transmitted (per each BB-modem
card).
RS Controller and Protection Switching

RS Controller is the main functionality performed by the "expansion" controller in N+1 system
types; it has to manage all the switching criteria, according to configurations received from NE
controller, local alarms and messages exchanged with the remote station using SCS channels
(for redundancy two 64 kbit/s channels are used, they occupy S23 RSOH byte in STM1#1 of
Channels 1 and 2).
Switching requests are sent to the remote RS Controller according to the estimated quality of
every single received radio channel and taking into account all the configurations (received RF
signal quality forcing, etc., as explained in the following) and also software detected alarms
(such as card fails), which are passed from the NE controller to the RS Controller via E-link.
7-4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
The decision for switching is always taken by the receiving side and also the forcing conditions
in a specific network element are referred to the received channels. The transmitter side shall
only actuate the requests of the remote station (and acknowledge the execution of the request).
CAF: channel quality, local alarms and commands
CAF (Control and Alarm Frame) is a communication channel that goes through all the BB-Modem cards (via back panel inside the same IDU and via B-Link between the two IDUs). This
information is made available to the "expansion" controller via SPI bus. It carries alarms and
commands related to N+1 switching functionality.
Quality (alarm state related) levels of the received RF channels, from the highest quality to the
lowest one, are:
normal;
early warning low (E_W_L) alarm active;
early warning high (E_W_H) alarm active;
high BER (H_BER) alarm active.
This information is transmitted by each BB-modem card to the RS Controller using CAF.
The protecting channel (from the remote station to the local one) will be occupied by the signal
transmitted on the protected channel with the worst quality, if the protecting channel has a better quality than the selected protected channel.
Other (local) information transmitted on the CAF are:
out of Frame condition for each demodulated STM-1 signal (from BB to RS controller);
major alarm for the transmitting section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; from BB to
RS Controller);
major alarm for the receiving section (one for each BB/modem-ODU chain; from BB to RS
Controller);
alarms related to the protection channel (from BB to RS Controller);
delay compensation between the two data streams, from radio side to tributary side, for
each hitless switch (from BB to RS Controller);
detection of an AIS insertion from the remote station to the local station;
commands for all the switches (from RS Controller to each BB).
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
7-5
SRA 4
Siemens
Protection exclusion, protection forcing and priority

A quality level can be forced via LCT for each channel and the selected quality has higher priority than the actual RF channel quality: in case of quality forcing, RS Controller replaces the
actual measure with the forced quality level when selecting the radio channel to be protected
and manual/test indication is activated.
Each protected channel can be configured via LCT to not occupy the protecting channel.
The RS Controller ignores the actual RF quality level of that protected channel when selecting
the radio channel to be protected; manual/test indication is activated.
The protection functionality itself can be disabled (RPS Locked command): N+1 system type
becomes a N+0 system type.
Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channel.
The RS Controller ignores the quality levels of all the protected channels and requires the remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on the protecting radio channel;
after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local one will switch the Rx section of
the selected channel on the data stream received from the stand-by channel. Manual/test indication is activated.
Each of the protected channels can be configured to occupy the protecting channel when no
quality-related alarms are active for any protected channel. The RS Controller requests to the
remote RS Controller to transmit the selected protected channel on the protecting channel, but,
after the confirmation of the remote RS Controller, the local one will keep on using, in the receiver section, the protected channel ignoring the protecting one.
Two (or three) protected channels may activate the same quality level alarm at the same time
or at different times. The following rules apply:
if equal quality alarms are detected at the same time, the protecting channel will be requested for the protected channel with the lowest index (the index is equal to the corresponding
logical BB-modem card index, i.e. 1, 2 and 3);
a protected channel occupying the protecting one won't be switched back to the working
one, if another protected channel with a lower index activates the same quality alarm later.
RPS Locked Mode

In RPS (Radio Protection Switching) Locked mode the switching functionality is temporarily
disabled. All received working channels are forced in normal state and no requests are sent to
the remote RS Controller to require the transmission of a selected protected channel on the
protecting channel.
RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode and transmits a message to the remote RS controller to make it aware of the situation in the following cases:
7-6
command disabling the Radio Protection Switching functionality (RPS Locked command);
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
receiving alarm active on both the SCS channels;
Stand-By Channel is no longer able to support the switching functionality (software disconnection or any hardware alarm affecting the transmit section or the receive section);
Channel 2 is no longer able to support the switching functionality (software disconnection

or hardware fault affecting base band portion);
B-link failure (detected via CAF).
RS Controller enters the RPS Locked mode if it receives a "RPS Locked" message from the
remote RS Controller but, in this case, it does not transmit a message to the remote RS controller, otherwise a loop would arise (each station will keep on staying in RPS Locked mode because the remote one is in RPS Locked mode).
RS Controller Frozen Mode
If the NE Controller enters the Frozen mode, the RS controller is also controlled to enter the
Frozen mode.
When in Frozen mode, the RS Controller freezes the position of the switches in the receiving
side and does not take into account any change in the radio alarm states. Configurations affecting the "quality function" of the channels is refused.
Switching in transmission direction is still performed according to messages transmitted by the
remote RS Controller.
Frozen mode is usually entered as a consequent action of a failure detection.
Messages on SCS channels
Two 64 kbit/s channels are used at radio level to connect the two RS Controllers.
Transmitted messages can be divided into two categories: urgent and non urgent.
Urgent messages are the ones used to manage the switching: requests to transmit a specified
protected channel signal on the protecting (stand-by) radio channel and confirmations that a
protected channel is being transmitted on the protecting channel.
These messages are transmitted on both the SCS channels and are repeated 5 times to have
a higher probability that the remote RS Controller receives them. In case more urgent messages have to be transmitted, they are interleaved to reduce delays.
Non urgent messages are cyclically and alternatively transmitted on the two channels. They are
relevant to switching criteria and switching alarms of each channel, channels occupying the
protecting channel, channel disabling (user's configuration or automatic internal decision due
to failure), SCS alarms, CAF alarm and working condition of RS Controller (Frozen mode, RPS
Locked). If no cyclical messages are received for 200 ms, SCS alarm is activated.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
7-7
SRA 4
Siemens
Useless protection switching are avoided

It is useless occupying a radio protecting channel with severely degraded tributary signal(s).
Switching requests are not transmitted if on the remote station:
LOS, LOF or TIM tributary alarm is present (on the corresponding BB-modem) when tributary capacity is configured as STM-1 (both alarms are seen as an out of frame alarm from
the RS Controller via the CAF signal);
LOS, LOF or TIM alarms are present on both tributary signals (on the corresponding BBmodem) when tributary capacity is configured as 2xSTM-1.
If LOS/LOF/TIM tributary side alarms are detected on BB-modem card, a proper setting the 4
most significant bits of SOH S22 byte (the same used for ATPC messages) in the SDH frame
of STM-1#1 signal transmitted to the remote station is performed. The remote RS Controller
will be made aware of the condition and will not request the protection of this channel.
Refusing a protection switching request
It might happen that a protection switching request transmitted from the local RS Controller
could not be accomplished by the remote RS Controller for some reason (faulty condition or
something else).
No message is foreseen to inform the peer RS Controller that a request has not been accomplished. Local RS Controller infers its request has not been accomplished if it doesn't receive
an acknowledge message from the remote RS Controller within 200 ms.
Switching sequence examples
Let's consider a 3+1 system type in the following situation:
no forcing configuration enabled (completely automatic switching);
no quality alarm active on the received radio channels;
each tributary signal obtained selecting the corresponding protected RF channel;
protecting RF channel transporting channel 1.
In the following example, two switching sequences are analyzed, due to the activation of an
"Early Warning Low" alarm on channel 3 (point A) and then of a "Early Warning High" alarm on
channel 1 while E_W_L alarm is still active on channel 3 (point C).
a) Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 3 demodulator and passed to
local RS Controller via CAF signal.
7-8
1.
Local RS Controller verifies there isn't any alarm affecting protecting channel.
2.
Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (using both SCS
channels) to transmit signal 3 also on the protecting channel.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
3.
Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controller and transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the message stating channel 3 is
transmitted also on the protecting channel.
4.
Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached in receiving
section switch 3, then it moves Rx switch 3 from protected channel 3 side to protection
side.
b) Early Warning Low alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator and passed to
local RS Controller via CAF signal. Local RS Controller does not take any consequent action because the same quality level alarm is active on protected RF channel 3, and channel
3 is already occupying the protecting channel.
c)
Early Warning High alarm is activated by protected channel 1 demodulator and passed to
local RS Controller via CAF signal.
1.
Local RS Controller verifies quality related level of the protecting channel is better than
the quality level of protected channel 1. It also verifies that the quality level of the protected channel 1 is currently worse than the quality level of the protected channel 3
(currently occupying the protecting channel).
2.
Local RS Controller verifies the delay alignment in Rx switch 3 and then moves it back
on the protected channel 3.
3.
Local RS Controller transmits a request to the remote RS Controller (using both SCS
channels) to transmit signal 1 also on the protecting channel.
4.
Remote RS Controller accomplishes the request of the local RS Controller and transmits to the local RS Controller (via SCS channels) the message stating channel 1 is
transmitted also on the protecting channel.
5.
Local RS Controller verifies that delay compensation has been reached in receiving
section switch 1, then it moves Rx switch 1 from protected side to protection side.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
7-9
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 7.1 1+1 configuration system block diagram without tributary protection (with
SRA 4 IDU and SRA 4 IDU-STM1)
(*)
(**)
2 Mbit/s Wayside
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
WS Interface
WS processing
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
(**)
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
(*)
Switch
B
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
B1
ODU
Demodulator
L-RSOH
B2
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
WS processing
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
B
B1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
B2
(*) Do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1

(**) 2xSTM1 do not foreseen in SRA4 IDU-STM1
7-10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 7.2 1+1 configuration system block diagram with tributary protection( with SRA4
IDU only)
2 Mbit/s Wayside
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
WS Interface
WS processing
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
Switch
B
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
B1
ODU
Demodulator
L-RSOH
B2
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
Data Interface
2 Mbit/s Wayside
WS Interface
WS processing
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
A1
L-RSOH
Switch
A
Modulator
A2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
Switch
B
B1
SDH Interface
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
ODU
Demodulator
B2
7-11
SRA 4
Siemens
Physical channels used to manage switching functionality in 3+1 system type
Main IDU
Fig. 7.3
alarms and
commands
I 2C
bus
BB-modem S
alarms and
commands
BB-modem 1
SCS 1
B-link
E-link
RS
controller
7-12
SCS 1
SCS 2
SPI
interrupt
I 2C
bus
BB-modem 2
alarms and
commands
BB-modem 3
CAF
alarms and
commands
Expansion IDU
Controller
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 7.4
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Tx section

Tx Distributor
Tx
St.by
Not Used
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
BB UNIT "1"
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Stand-by Channel - IDU Main
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
To Demodulator
BB UNIT "2"
2 Mbit/s Wayside
Tx
CH.1
ODU
WS Interface
WS Processing
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Data Interface
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Channel 1 - IDU Main
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
To Demodulator
BB UNIT "1"
2 Mbit/s Wayside
Tx
CH.2
WS Interface
WS Processing
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Data Interface
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Channel 2 - IDU Exp.
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
To Demodulator
WS Interface
WS Processing
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Data Interface
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Channel 3 - IDU Exp.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
ODU
BB UNIT "2"
2 Mbit/s Wayside
Tx
CH.3
ODU
ODU
To Demodulator
7-13
Siemens
Fig. 7.5
7-14
SRA 4
N+1 (3+1) configuration system block diagram: Rx section
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
8.1
ODU Functional Description
The IF signals, coming/sent from/to the IDU, are properly treated in the IF subunit. Here a primary lightning protection and the DC extraction are performed. A diplexer sends the IF signals
to the IF sections and the FSK subcarrier to the modem unit.
The power supply returns to the IF subunit the required voltages to be distributed to the other
utilizers.
The Rx IF (140 MHz), coming from the microwave receiver, is addressed to the IDU while the
Tx IF (350 MHz), coming from the IDU, is sent to the transceiver together a DC voltage: the
presence of the DC voltage enables the transmitter to operate at fixed gain (AGC OFF).
The IF unit houses the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuits, a frequency reference oscillator
(TCXO) and a single chip microprocessor controller to menage the hardware inside the ODU.
The dual VCO subunit provides a very low phase noise UHF signals to synchronize the RF
VCOs.
The transceiver interfaces the filter diplexer which insures the required decoupling between
transmitter and receiver modules.
The outdoor unit (ODU), shown in Fig. 8.1, is a cabinet containing:
the RF parts,
Microwave Diplexer Filter
Dual UHF VCO subunit
Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF)
and a power supply distributor containig the outdoor side of a FSK modulated communication
channel for IDU-ODU signalling:
IF unit with FSK subunit
Power supply.
8.1.1
Main characteristics
The ODU supports continous linear ATPC.

The ODU has the following external connections:
AGC voltage measurement on a BNC connector
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-1
SRA 4
Siemens
IF Connection for IDU-ODU cable connection (connector type N)
Waveguide flange for connection to antenna
An RS-232 interface accessible from outside the ODU is provided for the connection with
a PC during tests, factory tuning and for Inventory (7C LEMO Connector)
IF LO and RF LO connectors for the CC configuration.
8.1.1.1
Unit description
8.1.1.2
Power supply
Converts the DC voltage to the voltages required by other subunits, provides alarm for failures,
extracts the DC voltage from the cable and insures the primary lightning protection.
The ODU must withstand holes in the Power Supply Voltage coming from IDU up to 6 msec.
A surge protector is also mounted on this unit to prevent any damage that can occur due to
lightning discharge (5KV protection according to I.E.C. 801-5).
IF unit
Is a transversal unit; it includes IF duplexer, dual IF processing, dual PLL circuit, IDU/ODU communication channel, ODU hardware controller.
A triplexer addresses the IF and FSK signals respectively to the IF sections and the FSK subcarriers toward the modem.
The Tx IF (350MHz) is up-converted to 1690MHz, filtered and sent to the transmitter; the Rx
IF, coming from the microwave receiver (2180MHz), is down-converted to 140MHz and sent to
the IDU.
The IF unit houses also the cable equalizer, a couple of PLL circuit, a frequency reference oscillator.
FSK sub-unit
This subunit collects, manages and processes the informations (alarms, commands, data
channels) coming / going from / to the different units into the Radio Terminal Unit in the IDU.
The communication between ODU and IDU is performed by FSK mo-demodulation of two distinct carriers at 10 MHz (from ODU to IDU) and at 7 MHz (from IDU to ODU).
This unit has also the task to distribute the secondary voltages to all the units contained in the
ODU.
8-2
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Microwave Transceiver Front-end subunit

The subunit is composed of a transmitter section and a receiver section.
The transmitter receives as input the 1690 MHz IF signal coming from the IF subunit and up
converts it into a radio frequency signal by means of TX local oscillator. The signal is then amplified by the power section and transmitted to the microwave duplexer.
The receiver section receives from the antenna a radio frequency signal, amplifies by means
of a LNA and equalizes it, and then down converts it into a 2180 MHz IF signal by means of RX
local oscillator. The IF signal is amplified and then transmitted to the IF subunit and then to the
indoor unit (demodulator section).
The two Local Oscillators (one for the transmitter section and one for the receiver section) are
composed of two broadband VCOs phase locking to the UHF signal incoming from the DUAL
UHF VCO.
The Microwave Transceiver Front-end (MWTF) allows to translate a multilevel QAM modulated
signal from the intermediate frequency IF to the microwave field and vice versa. MWTF operates in temperature range from -33 C to + 55 C.
A simplified block diagram of the unit is shown in Fig. 8.2. The unit consists of a transmission
up-converter (including the relevant phase lockable oscillator PLO), of a receiver down converter (including the relevant PLO) and a dc section including ALC driver telemetry/alarm and biasing circuits.
The transmitter section includes a variable gain IF preamplifier and filter, IF linearizer, up-converter (which besides converting the IF signal must reject the Image and LO signals), a power
stage an output detector, and a wave-guide isolator.
The transmitter can support high complexity QAM modulation format.
The transmitter always operates in closed loop. The EEPROM (previously programmed) suitable addressed, provides digital serial data to the IF PROCESSOR unit (an equipment that interface the MWTF unit trough a multipin connector). The digital data are analog converted inside the IF PROCESSOR and then returned to the microwave transceiver. The analog voltage
is the reference for the ALC driver (Which contains a detector diode for temperature compensation) and supplied to the power control module (variable gain amplifier or variable attenuator).
The receiver consists of a wave-guide isolator, an LNA, variable RF linear attenuator, an image
rejection filter, a down converter-mixer and an IF stage with adjustable gain.
The two PLOs (for the Tx and Rx sections) are implemented using the same circuit. A broadband VCO is phase locked to the UHF input signal according to the circuit of Fig. 8.2. Since the
phase noise close to the carrier is determined by the UHF signal and above all because the
microwave module is not mechanical isolated, the PLL filter must be dimensioned to have a cutoff frequency of about 10 MHz.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-3
SRA 4
Siemens
The unit includes also five digital potentiometer with internal memory in order to set all the parameters necessary for the best working condition (Tx, Rx linearity, RF/IF receiver nominal
gain).
Dual UHF VCO subunit
The subunit is composed of two UHF VCOs: their frequencies are synthesized by means of two
indipendent synthesizers placed in the IF subunit. The frequencies of the VCOs are used as
reference frequencies for the Tx and Rx PLLs located in RF module.
Both the oscillators have a low phase noise active device in order to guarantee the required
noise specifications.
The relative resonant cavity is a coaxial dielectric resonator with such a Q factor in order to
achieve the required effective bandwidth varying the varactors voltage.
Then the VCO output signal is opportunely amplified.
With CC operations the two VCO subunits must be synchronized in Rx.
This synchronisation is established through 2 coaxial cables situated between the two ODU's.
Two synchronisms flow on the 2 cables, i.e., the first Rx conversion (from RF frequency to 2180
MHz) and the second Rx conversion (from 2180 MHz to 140 MHz).
With regard to CC operation, one of the two ODU's must be software-preset to Master (generates synchronisms) and the other ODU operating as Slave (receives the synchronisms from
the ODU Master).
Microwave Duplexer filter
The Duplexer filter is composed of two band-pass microwave filters connecting the RF module
to the antenna: in this way it is possible to use the same antenna to transmit and receive.
The Microwave Duplexer insures the tunability in a quarter of RF band.
Tx Alarm
A loss of the RF transmitted power is detected with an alarm relayed via the FSK communication channel to the IDU.
ATPC option
In the equipment ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) function is available.
ATPC is linear and continuous.
8-4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
8.2
Siemens
IDU FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The IDU consists of 4 types of units connected together via the backplane:
Controller unit
Par. 8.2.1
Alarm Restitution unit
Par. 8.2.2
Fan unit
Par. 8.2.3
BB-Modem unit
Par. 8.2.4
8.2.1
Controller unit
The function of the unit is of system controller and MCF. The unit configures the system and
controls the alarm system by managing the right transit and the transmission of the payload
and service streams. The following are also provided: the F Interface for the LCT, the Q interface for the supervisory system and the 4 general alarm indicating LEDs of the system.
8.2.2
Alarm Restitution Unit
The function of the unit is of restituting the system alarms managed by the Controller unit and
of making the remote-commands/remote controls of the remote station available to the external
source through a Sub-D connector fitted on the front panel. It also manages the 2 fans present
on the subrack and their failure. The switch used to switch ON the equipment is fitted on the
front panel together with a connector for the insertion of the Memory Key.
8.2.3
Fan unit
Two fans are present on this unit, which constantly ventilate the IDU assembly.
8.2.4
BB-MODEM unit
The unit carries out the following operation:
STM-1 input/output interfacing and base band processing; this interface can either be of
the electric or of the optical type. Base band processing is of the RSA type (Regenerator
Section Adaptation); the MSA function (Multiplex Section Adaptation) is not implemented.
Drop/Insert of the 2 Mb/s stream as WS traffic (Way Side)

(not available in the BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65).
Drop/Insert of the two 64 kbit/s housekeeping channels (G703 and V11).
Generation of a 350MHz IF modulated signal for the ODU transmitter.
Processing and demodulation of the 140MHz IF signal incoming from the ODU receiver.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-5
SRA 4
Siemens
The IF IDU-ODU cable interface, suitable to power the ODU, suitable for IF Tx and Rx connections, IDU-ODU alarms and housekeeping communications through the FSK modulated sub-carriers.
8.2.4.1
BB Section
Refer to Fig. 8.4.

The CMI (G.703) coded input signal is amplified, converted from CMI to NRZ and converted
from serial to parallel.
The data is then transmitted to the T-RSOH drop block, which will carry out the following RSOH
terminating functions:
frame alignment through the searching of the A1 and A2 bytes of the STM-1 frame.
data descrambling
calculation of the BIP-8 parity with the B1received bytes
check of any other alarms contained in the SOH bytes (e.g., MS-AIS. MS-RDI)
D1, D2, D3 and D4-D12 transit transparently (they are not managed)
E1 transits transparently (it is not managed)
F1 is dropped if configured as 64 kbit/s AUX or transits transparently.
Therefore the signal is sent to the R-RSOH insert circuit in order to insert the new bytes of the
RSOH, including the 64 kbit/s signals or the 2 Mbit/s WST one. The tributary switch will receive
the cited signal or that coming from the other BB+MODEM unit (should the tributary be protected) and make it transit.
On the Receive side the signal coming from the Modem section enters the Hitless switch through one path, while on the other path enters the signal incoming from the second BB+MODEM unit, i.e., in case of the 1+1 configuration.
Based on the alarms of the Modem section the Hitless switch extracts the best signal and hitless switches (without errors).
At the output of the hitless switch are carried out operations on the RSOH bytes that are complementary to those carried out on the transmission side. The signal is hence parallel-to-serial
converted and then CMI encoded ready to be forwarded to the output.
Note: With regard to the 1+0 configuration, the switches are fixed and allow the transit of the
signal coming from the unit proper.
8-6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
8.2.4.2
Siemens
Modem Section
Overview
The functions performed by the modulator and demodulator are here below set down:
the pulse formation is obtained through techniques of digital signal processing (DSP). The
BB filtering is realized by digital FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filters and it implements a
formation of raised cosine pulse with a suitable roll-off factor.
At modulator side, these devices have fully programmable coefficients while, at demodulator side, the Rx filters have been designed with fixed coefficient structure.
The two post-modulation and post-demodulation filters are of analog and anti-aliasing type.
As the number of modulation states increases, the radio systems become more vulnerable
to multipath fading.
The Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) represents a powerful solution which shows
a better performance vs. complexity ratio, together with a lower sensitivity to timing phase.
High performances are assured by dinamic convergence, accomplished by means of a modified minimum mean-square error (MMSE) algorithm exhibiting "blind" convergence acquisition, combined with the recursive updating of tap coefficients.
The TCM coding utilization for the error correction allows the spectral net requested spectral efficiency is easily met by adopting a non-critical roll-off factor.
A 2 or 4-dimension trellis coding associated with an M-QAM crossed format has been adopted as the more effective solution as far as the transmission efficacy is concerned as well
as of total performances.
A maximum likelihood decoding procedure applies to the received sequence of 2D/4D

points by means of a Viterbi algorithm.
In case of 4D costellation as a preliminary step, the decoder detects the received 4D point;
it divides it into a pair of 2D points and the closest point in each 4D subset and its metrics
("Euclidean distance" between the two points) are evaluated on the basis the 2D points and
metric estimation.
The foregoing process can iteratively evaluate all the points in each multidimensional subset. By means of the Viterbi decoder the most probable transmitted sequence of subsets
is then estimated.
The process implies a slight complexity increase but operates at half the speed (considering two successive symbols at the same time).
The errors detected by the decoder allow two BER alarm thresholds to be provided (FAST
BER), to activate the Early Warning switching by means of the integrated hitless protection
system.
Cross Polarization Interface Canceller (XPIC) (not available in the BB-Modem units P/N
612-314/64-65)
The XPIC is automatically enabled in co-channel configuration.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-7
Siemens
SRA 4
Co-channel operation with high level modulation schemes requires very high cross-polarization
descrimination (XPD). Modern radio relay antennas meet the XPD requirements at least under
ideal propagation conditions; nevertheless cross-polarization interference (XPI) between orthogonally arranged channels may increase under particular conditions such as rainfall or multipath propagation.
As additional mean to counteract these phenomena, a powerful cross-polarization interference
canceller devices has been fit into the demodulator. Since the interference effects are time variable, the XPIC device structure (shown in Fig. 8.6) is adaptive, consisting also of transversal
filter.
At transmit side, it is not requested neither the common use for the V and H channels of a single
L.O. nor the synchronization of the two used oscillators.
There is also no strict requirement for clock synchronization at transmit side.
At receive side, beside the exchange of the received data signals at IF level, the only interconnection between vertical and horizontal channel is the L.O. synchronization of the receivers and
no additional clock synchronization of the demodulators is necessary. Another advantage of
this concept is the independence of the XPIC operation from the lock-in state of the carrier recovery being the carrier frequencies of the interfering signal and the compensation signal identical at the adder point. This greatly improves performances after strong XPI events since the
XPIC can first remove the XPI on the main signal, thus facilitating the subsequent lock-in procedure.
Refer to Fig. 8.5.
The interface with the BB section is at byte level, the IF one is at 350 MHz on the uplink and
140 MHz on the downlink. The modem implements a TCM encoding linked to a Reed Solomon.
A bit interleaver protects the pointer and reduces pointer slip. A byte interleaver distributes the
error burst generated by the TCM decoder in order to guarantee and efficient linked code.
Sampling is asynchronous both on the transmission side and on the receive side and it always
takes place at 200 MHz. This latter frequency is obtained through a quartz-crystal oscillator. A
variable interpolator matches the symbol frequency to the sampling frequency. The transmission carrier is obtained from another 350 MHz quartz-crystal oscillator. On the receive side instead, the 140 MHz IF is directly sampled hence a direct modulation is obtained.
The two IF signals are combined through a splitter, which guarantees the required isolation between the two paths. Over the same coaxial cable is established the dialogue (alarm and control
signal) between the Outdoor Section and the Indoor Section through two further FSK modulated sub-carriers whose frequencies are respectively 10 MHz for the Outdoor signal and 7 MHz
for the Indoor signal.
The Modem section also operates as a collector of the data to send to the Controller. In fact,
through the data bus the Controller receives the information concerning failures on the outdoor
unit (ODU) or on the cable interconnecting the ODU and Modem
8-8
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
.
According to a software setting the modulation scheme can be 128 TCM-4D or
32 TCM-2D.
8.3
LED, MONITORING POINTS, CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES
In this paragraph are reported the operations of all the control and command elements that are
present on the front panels of the units making up the equipment.
Fig. 8.7 to Fig. 8.10 illustrate the front panel of the indoor assembly showing the LEDs, the monitoring points, the connectors and the control elements.
The list and the function of the LEDs are reported in Tab. 8.1.
In the N+1 configuration some connectors are not used.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-9
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 8.1
Summary of the front panel LEDs
Unit
BB+MODEM
Unit
(Note 3)
LED
Colour
ODU
Alarm
Red
General ODU alarm: The alarm is dropped at Base-Band

level. It lights up when an alarm is present on the ODU or
the ODU is disconnected.
CABLE
Alarm
Yellow
CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is lower than

expected. The causes might be due to the cable either
breaking down or being disconnected, or to absence of
ODU.
CH A
(Note 1, 2)
CH B
(Note 1, 2)
'
CONTROLLER
Unit
Meaning
Red
CABLE alarm: lights up when current drain is higher than

expected. The cause might be due to a short-circuit on the
cable or on the ODU.
Green
Channel 1 currently used; the unit is currently operating by

using channel 1 (Refer to Fig. 8.11 and Fig. 8.12).
Yellow
Channel 1 currently used by a software forcing (Refer to

Fig. 8.11 and Fig. 8.12).
Green
Channel 2 currently used; the unit is currently operating by

using channel 2 (Refer to Fig. 8.13 and Fig. 8.14).
Yellow
Channel 2 currently used by a software forcing (Refer to

Fig. 8.13 and Fig. 8.14).
Red
General unit alarm: the LED is ON if the battery cable is

disconnected.
Green
Power Supply Status: the LED is ON in case of normal

operating condition.
'
Red
TEST
Yellow
Unusual alarm: The LED lights up when the equipment is

not operating according to what configured, but is "forced"
into an unusual condition.
CRITICAL/
MAJOR
Red
Critical/ Major alarm: If ON it denotes the presence of a

Critical/Major" alarm inside the IDU, for which an immediate
(Critical) or urgent (Major) corrective action is required.
MINOR /
WARNING
Red
Minor/ Warning alarm: If ON it denotes the presence of a

"Minor/Warning" alarm inside the IDU, for which a corrective
action is not urgently required.
General alarm inside the unit: Card Fail alarm.
Note 1: This LED displays the position of the Rx switch.

Note 2: In the N+1 configuration this LED is always OFF on the Standby BB-Modem
unit.
Note 3: In N+1 configuration on the BB-Modem units relevant to the protected channels
LED CH. A and CH. B have the following meaning:
8-10
CH.A ON, CH. B OFF: working channel
CH. A OFF, CH. B ON: channel on standby.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 8.1
Siemens
Outdoor unit
(5)
(4)
RF
AMPLIFIER
RF
VCO
RF
RF
RECEIVER
RF
VCO
SYNT
UHF
RICEIVER
(3)
V
C
O
(1)
FSK
SUBUNIT
(2)
TCXO
+6.5V
+12V
RF GROUP COMPOSITION
1) Power supply
2) IF unit
3) MWTF
4) Dual UHF VCO
5) Filter duplexer
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
+25V
350 MHz
140 MHz
-VB
IF CABLE
8-11
SRA 4
Siemens
MWTF simplified block diagram
DIGITAL
POTENTIOM.
(with internal
memory)
Fig. 8.2
8-12
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.3
IDU Subrack
SRA4 IDU
CHACHB
Alarms
U
n.
IDU
Key
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
PS
IF
PS
IF + Modem + ODU Power supply
Power supply + Alarms
Tributary + Services + ODU Power supply

Fan
Controller

SRA4 IDU-STM1
Power supply + Alarms

Fan
Controller

IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-13
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.4
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: BB Section

From other MOD
AUX channels
TRIB
switch
STM-1
S2P
T-RSOH
drop
ATPC insert
R-RSOH
insert
P2S
To MOD
BYTE_OUT
S2P
STM-1
LOS, LOF, J0(TIM),

B1, PM, MS-AIS, MSRDI, DCC-R mng
(*)
B1 regeneration,
Insertion of : J0,
WS, DCC-R
Main / Prot
Clock 155
CPU
FSK processing
To MOD
16 MB SDRAM
2x4 MB FLASH
2 MB EEPROM
AUX channels
STM-1
CMI
P2S
T-RSOH
insert
R-RSOH
drop
SWITCH
hitless
BYTE_IN
ATPC drop
From its own local DEM

From prot DEM
STM-1
(*)
LOF, J0 (TIM), B1,

PM, DCC-R mng
8
Clock 155
(*) not available in tha BB-Modem units P/N 612-314/64-65
8-14
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 8.5
Siemens
Block diagram of the BB-MODEM unit: MODEM Section
BYTE_IN
I
DAC
CK_IN
BYTE_OUT
BB
PROC
p/2
FSK
MODEM
CK_OUT
350 MHz
clock XO
offset
(from BB proc.)
PLL RX byte
(19.44 / 38.88)
IF 350 MHz (Tx)
7 MHz (Tx)
TRIP
10 MHz (Rx)
140 MHz (Rx)
peak
(from BB proc.)
ADC
IFX OUT
ADC
IFX IN
:2
200 MHz
clock XO
:1
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-15
Siemens
Fig. 8.6
8-16
SRA 4
XPIC Concept
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.7
Front panel of the IDU with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit

9
10
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
13
U
S
E
R
WST
V11 G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
CABLE
ALM
12
12
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
ODU PWR
I
O
IF
Out
PS
F
A
N
LCT
12
U
n.
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
12
11
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels (byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703 or byte
F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11) (in N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only))
2 - Connector SubD-9 RS-232 for LCT links
3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic
4 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic
5 - SMA connector for ODU connection
6 - ODU power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)
7 - LED
8 - Connector for the KEY
9 - SubD-25 connector for in/out parallel alarms, remote control
10 - IDU general power supply switch (with protection against accidental activation)
11 - Bipolar connector for station battery
12 - Not used
13 - RJ45 connector for the Q supervisory interface
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-17
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.8
Front panel of the IDU with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit

9
10
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU PWR
Key
I
Q-lan E-Link
13
12
U
S
E
R
V11 G703
WST
In Out
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
Out In
CABLE
ALM
12
12
CO-CH
Exp. Port In
Out
ODU PWR
I
O
IF
PS
F
A
N
LCT
U
n.
STM-1 #1
Out In
12
11
1 - RJ45 connector for 64 kbit/s data channels (byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703 or byte
F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11) (in N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only))
2 - SubD-9 RS-232 connector for LCT link
3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic
4 - 1-0/2.3 Coaxial connector for 2 Mbit/s WST traffic
7 - LED
11 - Bipolar connector for the station battery
12 - Not used
13 - RJ45 connector for the supervisory Q interface
8-18
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 8.9
Siemens
Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with electrically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
7
12 11
10
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels :

(byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11)
(In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only)
3 - 1-0/2.3 coaxial connector for STM-1 traffic
6 - LED
11 - Not used
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-19
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.10 Front panel of the SRA4 IDU-STM1 with optically interfaced BB-MODEM unit
7
12
11
10
1 - Connector RJ45 for 64 kbit/s data channels :

(byte F1: int. V.11; byte S23: int. G.703) or (byte F1: int. G.703; byte S23: int. V.11)
(In N+1 configuration byte F1 is used only)
3 - Optical connector for STM-1 traffic
6 - LED
11 - Not used
8-20
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.11 LED CH. A ON: block diagram without tributary protection
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
STM-1
electrical/optical
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx2
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
STM-1
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
Switch
Rx
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.B
Data Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.B
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.A
not used
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-21
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.12 LED CH. A ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA 4 IDU only)
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
STM-1
electrical/optical
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx2
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
STM-1
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.B
Data Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
STM-1
electrical/optical
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
STM-1
electrical/optical
8-22
Switch
Rx
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.B
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.A
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.13 LED CH. B ON: block diagram without tributary protection
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
STM-1
electrical/optical
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx2
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
STM-1
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
Ch.B
Data Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.B
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
not used
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
8-23
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 8.14 LED CH. B ON: block diagram with tributary protection (with SRA 4 IDU only)
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
STM-1
BB UNIT 1
Data Interface
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx1
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx2
electrical/optical
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
STM-1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Demodulator
Ch.B
electrical/optical
64 kbit/s
V.11/G.703
Ch.A
ODU
Data Interface
1+1
BASE BAND
INTERCONNECTION
BB UNIT 2
STM-1
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
Tx2
L-RSOH
Switch
Tx
Modulator
Tx1
electrical/optical
fixed
IF, FSK, DC
Interface
ODU
Switch
Rx
STM-1
electrical/optical
8-24
SDH Interface
T-RSOH
L-RSOH
Ch.B
Ch.A
ODU
Demodulator
not used
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Installation
9.1
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS (for SRA4 IDU only)
The internal connections are based on the equipment configuration and on the type of channelling implemented.
1.
2+0 CC configured equipment (par. 9.1.1):

The internal connections must be made between the two ODU's and on the IDU.
2.
2x(1+1) FD CC configured equipment (par. 9.1.2 and par. 9.1.3)
3.
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC Configured equipment (par. 9.1.4)
4.
N+1 configured equipment (par. 9.1.5):

The internal connections must be made between the two IDU's.
9.1.1
2+0 CC Configuration
To set up the CC configuration coaxial cable connections must be implemented on the IDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 9.1 and Fig. 9.2).
9.1.2
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with one antenna)
To set up the CC configuration coaxial cable connections must be implemented on the IDU assembly and on the ODU assemblies (see Fig. 9.3, Fig. 9.4 and Fig. 9.5).
9.1.3
2x(1+1) FD CC configuration (with two antennas)
9.1.4
2x(1+1) Hot Standby CC configuration
9.1.5
N+1 Configuration
The connections between the IDU assemblies shown in Fig. 9.12 must be made in order to set
up the supervisory link (E-link) and the protection link (B-link).
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-1
SRA 4
Siemens
9.2
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
All the connectors used for the external connections are easily accessible from the front side
of the indoor assembly.
All the cables from/to the outside are brought down from the cabinet top inside the side wall
slots or, in the case the wiring is running under the raised floor, they are made to ascend likewise.
9.2.1
SRA 4 IDU
9.2.1.1
Primary supply voltage connection
The outdoor assembly (Transceiver) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly (P/N
702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1 configuration).
The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the delivered -48
V voltage.
The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-poles male
connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 9.13.
9.2.1.2
Connector functions
Fig. 9.15 to Fig. 9.19 show the positions and functions of the connectors P/N 598-645/45.
In the N+1 configuration the connectors with a cross in Fig. 9.14 are not used.
9-2
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
9.2.2
SRA IDU-STM1
9.2.2.1
Primary supply voltage connection
The outdoor assembly (Transceiver) is remotely power supplied by the indoor assembly (P/N
702-300/12) by means of an IF coaxial connection cable (2 in the 1+1 configuration).
The indoor assembly BB units are fed by DC/DC converters, which transform the delivered -48
V voltage.
The primary supply voltage, delivered by 48 V battery, has to be applied to the 2-poles male
connector MAIN POWER INPUT. See Fig. 9.20.
9.2.3
CONNECTOR FUNCTIONS
Fig. 9.21 to Fig. 9.24, show the positions and functions of the connectors P/N 598-645/45.
9.3
IDU/ODU connection with Braided or 1/4 Coaxial Cable
The indoor assembly is connected by one IF coaxial cable to the outdoor assembly (transceiver) (see Fig. 9.25 and Fig. 9.26).
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-3
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.1
IDU assembly with CC configuration connections

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION
(Note)
CHACHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
IF
PS
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
PS
Note: These cables are included in the P/N 702-300/12.
9-4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 9.2
Siemens
ODU AP/CC assemblies with CC configuration connections
IF LO coaxial cable
Antenna
side
Antenna
side
ODU
AP/CC 1
TOP VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
Antenna
side
Antenna
side
ODU
AP/CC 1
BOTTOM VIEW
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
ODU
AP/CC 2
TOP VIEW
ODU
AP/CC 2
BOTTOM VIEW
9-5
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.3

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION
(Note)
IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)

CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
D
CO-CH ODU PWR
I
O
CH. 1
PS
V-pol.
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
In Out
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
In Out
CH. 1
PS
H-pol.
IF
CH. 2
PS
E-link
Note: Cables P/N 314-107/97 L=150mm, these cables are included in the P/N 702-300/12.
9-6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 9.4
Siemens
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna))
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW
1st (1+1) ODU system
2 nd (1+1) ODU system
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-7
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.5
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF HYBR.
V Pol.
SIDE
RF HYBR.
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
9-8
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.6

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION (Note)
1+1 IDU ( V-H) pol.

CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
1+1 IDU (H-V) pol.
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CH. 1
V-POL
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
PS
IF
CH. 2
H-POL.
PS
IF
In Out
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
In Out
PS
IF
PS
CH. 1
H-POL.
CH.2
V-POL.
E-link
Note: Cables P/N 314-107/97 L=150mm, these cables are included in the
P/N 702-300/12.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-9
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.7
IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)

IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW
9-10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Fig. 9.8
Siemens
RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs ( 2x(1+1) FD with two antennas)

RF LO coaxial cable
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF C.P. Filter
H Pol.
SIDE
RF C.P. Filter
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-11
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.9

CONNECTIONS for
CC CONFIGURATION
(Note)
IDU 1+1 (V-pol.)

CHA CHB
Alarms
U
n.
IDU
Key
Q-lan E-Link
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
IDU
Key
Q-lan E-Link
IDU 1+1 (H-pol.)
9-12
U
n.
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
D
CO-CH ODU PWR
I
O
PS
MAIN
V-pol.
IF
STBY
PS
IF
In Out
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
In Out
MAIN
PS
IF
PS
H-pol.
STBY
E-link
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.10 IF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) Hot Standby)
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
TOP SIDE VIEW
IF LO coaxial cable
(Note)
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
TOP SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 4
TOP SIDE VIEW
1st (1+1) HSBYODU system
2nd (1+1) HSBY ODU system
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-13
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.11 RF LO Connection diagram between the ODUs (2x(1+1) FD with one antenna)
RF LO coaxial cable
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 3
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
AP/CC ODU 1
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
RF LO coaxial cable
RF COUPLER
H Pol.
SIDE
RF COUPLER
V Pol.
SIDE
AP/CC ODU 2
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
1st (1+1) HSBYODU system
9-14
AP/CC ODU 4
BOTTOM SIDE VIEW
2nd (1+1) HSBY ODU system
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.12 Connection between the IDU assemblies (B-link and E-link)
CHACHB
Alarms
Key
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
E-link (Note)
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
PS
CH. 3
B-link (Note)
Note: These cables are included in the N+1 base connection elements (P/N 597-525/57).
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-15
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.13 Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly

CHA CHB
Alarm
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
CHA CHB
Q-lan
E--link
LCT
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CO-CH
CABLE
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
Out
CO-CH
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU PWR
O
I
In
Out
PS
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
IF
PS
Main power
input
A2
A1
Soldering side view

Pin No
Signal
A1
A2
9-16
-VBAT
+VBAT
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.14 Connectors not used in the N+1 configuration

CHA CHB
Alarms
Key
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
I
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
Alarms
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
Key
LCT
E-link
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
U
n.
IDU
O
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHA CHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
CO-CH ODU PWR

I
O
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
D
CO-CH ODU PWR
I
O
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
In Out
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
IF
In Out
Exp. Port
CH. 2
PS
IF
CH. 3
PS
B-link
9-17
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.15 155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections

Electrical interface
CHA CHB
Alarm
Q-lan
Key
E- link
IDU PWR
I
U
n.
F
A
LCT
U
S
E
R
V11
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
V11
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
OUT
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
STM 1 #2
STM 1 #1
IN
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
CABLE
ALM
IN
OUT
Optical interface
CHA CHB
Alarm
Q-lan
E- link
Key
LCT
IDU PWR
O
U
n.
F
A
N
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
V11
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
ODU
ALM
STM-1 #2
Out In
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
STM 1 #1
OUT IN
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
CABLE
ALM
ODU PWR
I
O
CO-CH
In Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
STM 1 #2
OUT IN
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections

Coax.
IN
OUT
Signal
155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703)
155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections

SC
IN
OUT
9-18
Signal
Optical Tributary Input
Optical Tributary Output
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.16 WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections

Alarm
Q-lan
E- link
Key
IDU PWR
I
U
n.
LCT
F
A
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In
Out
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CABLE
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
WS
IN
OUT
WST 2 Mbit/s Coaxial Connections

Connect. Position
IN
OUT
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Description
2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS Input
2048 Mbit/s/75 Ohm (G.703) WS Output
9-19
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.17 Alarm Connector (IDU assembly

Alarm
Q-lan
Key
E- link
U
n.
IDU PWR
I
F
A
N
LCT
13
25
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In
Out
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CO-CH
CABLE
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
PS
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
IF
PS
ALARMS
14
Alarms Connector (IDU assembly)
9-20
Pin
1
Signal
ALIM OFF
2
3
8
9
4
10
5
11
6
12
7
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CRITICAL
MINOR
MAJOR
TEST
CEN-OUT1
CEN-OUT2
CEN-OUT3
CEN-OUT4
CEN-IN1
CEN-IN2
CEN-IN3
CEN-IN4
RESTFAULT
RESTFAULTN
-
Description
No secondary power supply on both
BB-Modem units
Critical alarm
Minor alarm
Major alarm
Test/Warning alarm
Station command output #1
Station alarm input #1
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Interface type
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
-
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Cont.
Interface B = electronic contact
normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc;

> 60 kohm)
alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc;
< 200 ohm)
INPUT STATION ALARMS:
the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is
less than 5 V
the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is

between -70 V and 75 V.
OUTPUT ALARMS:
the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be

positive voltage or negative voltage:
open resistance > 500 Mohm
ground resistance < 1 ohm
max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc
max. switching current: 0.5 A
max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W
Note: Refer also to "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electrical

interface of the alarms.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-21
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.18 LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf)

Alarm
Q-lan
Key
E- link
IDU PWR
I
F
A
LCT
LCT
U
n.
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CABLE
ALM
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
PS
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
IF
PS
9
5
LCT (RS 232) Connector

PIN
9-22
Signal
I/O
Description
F_CD
Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier

Detect)
F_RXD
Received Data
F_TXD
Transmit Data
F_DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GND
F_DSR
Data Set Ready
F_RTS
Request To Send
F_CTS
Clear To Send
n.c.
Ring Indicator
Signal Ground
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.19 64 kbit/s service channel connector

CHA CHB
Alarm
Q-lan
Key
E- link
IDU PWR
I
LCT
U
n.
F
A
N
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
STM-1 #1
In Out
STM-1 #2
In Out
CHA CHB
U
S
E
R
V11
G703
STM-1 #1
In Out
CO-CH
In
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
2MBit/s
In Out
CABLE
ALM
STM-1 #2
In Out
CABLE
ALM
Exp. Port
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
CO-CH
In
Out
ODU PWR
O
I
IF
PS
IF
PS
V.11 channel connector

PIN
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Signal
CKB
CKA
DB
DA
CKB
CKA
DB
DAa
I/O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
Description
Clock B - codirectional output
Clock A - codirectional output
Data B - codirectional output
Data A - codirectional output
Clock B - contradirectional output
Clock A - contradirectional output
Data B - contradirectional input
Data A - contradirectional input
In case theExternal EOWshould be used, use the V11 connector

as follows:
(1+0)/(1+1) configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper

BB-MODEM unit.
N+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the lower

BB-MODEM unit of the MAIN IDU.
(2+0) configuration: use the V11 connector of the two

BB-MODEM units.
G.703 channel connector

PIN
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Signal
OUT OUT +
IN +
IN -
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
I/O
O
O
I
I
Description
Output Output +
Input +
Input -
9-23
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.20 Primary Power Supply Connections in IDU assembly
Main power
input
A2
A1
Soldering side view

Pin
No
A1
9-24
Signal
-
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.21 155 Mbit/s Tributary Connections

Electrical interface
STM 1
IN
OUT
Optical interface
STM 1
OUT
IN
155 Mbit/s Electrical Tributary Coaxial Connections

Coax.
IN
OUT
Signal
155 Mbit/s Tributary Input 75 Ohm (G.703)
155 Mbit/s Tributary Output 75 Ohm (G.703)
STM-1 Optical Tributary Connections

SC
IN
OUT
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
Signal
Optical Tributary Input
Optical Tributary Output
9-25
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.22 Alarm Connector (IDU assembly)
13
25 ALARMS
9-26
1
14
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Cont.
Alarms Connector (IDU assembly)
Pin
Signal
Description
Interface type
1
ALIM OFF
No secondary power supply on both BB-Modem units
B
2
CRITICAL
Critical alarm
B
3
MINOR
Minor alarm
B
8
MAJOR
Major alarm
B
9
TEST
Test/Warning alarm
B
4
CEN-OUT1
B
10
CEN-OUT2
B
5
CEN-OUT3
B
11
CEN-OUT4
B
6
CEN-IN1
B
12
CEN-IN2
B
7
CEN-IN3
B
13
CEN-IN4
B
14
RESTFAULT
B
15
RESTFAULTN
B
16
Not used
17
Not used
18
Not used
19
Not used
20
Not used
21
Not used
22
Not used
23
Not used
24
Not used
25
Not used
Interface B = electronic contact
normal condition = open (-3 ... +2 Vdc; > 60 kohm)
alarm condition = ground (-3 ... +2 Vdc; < 200 ohm)
INPUT STATION ALARMS:
the input does not sink current as long as the input voltage is
less than 5 V
the circuit will not be damaged as long as the input voltage is

between -70 V and 75 V.
OUTPUTS ALARMS:
the external equipment (sensing the output alarms) can be positive voltage or negative voltage:
open resistance > 500 Mohm
ground resistance < 1 ohm
max. switching voltage: 110 Vdc
max. switching current: 0.5 A
max. switching power (resistive load): 15 W

Note: Refer also to "TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS" for the electrical interface of the alarms.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-27
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.23 LCT (RS 232) Connector (IDU shelf)
LCT
9
5
LCT (RS 232) Connector

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9-28
Signal
F_CD
I/O
I
F_RXD
F_TXD
F_DTR
GND
F_DSR
F_RTS
F_CTS
n.c.
I
O
O
I
O
Description
Received Line Signal Detector (Data Carrier
Detect)
Received Data
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Ring Indicator
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.24 64 kbit/s service channel connector
V.11 channel connector

PIN
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Signal
CKB
CKA
DB
DA
CKB
CKA
DB
DAa
I/O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
Description
Clock B - codirectional output
Clock A - codirectional output
Data B - codirectional output
Data A - codirectional output
Clock B - contradirectional output
Clock A - contradirectional output
Data B - contradirectional input
Data A - contradirectional input
In case theExternal EOWshould be used, use the V11 connector

as follows:
- 1+0/1+1 configuration: use the V11 connector of the upper BBMODEM unit
- 2+0 configuration: use the V11 connector of the two BB-MODEM units.
G.703 channel connector
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal
OUT OUT +
IN +
IN -
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
I/O
O
O
I
I
Description
Output Output +
Input +
Input -
9-29
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.25 Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - ODU side connection
Coaxial connector
90 N type
To IDU section
To IDU section
9-30
Braided or 1/4 IN/OUT

coaxial cable
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 9.26 Braided or 1/4 coaxial cable - Connection on IDU side
TO GROUNDING BAR
ETSI (19) RACK
to odu
section
(a)
(c)
OSM/N coaxial tail

(L.=1 Mt.)
(314-327/91)
Braided or 1/4
coaxial cable
(a)
(c)
(b)
Coaxial N-plug
Ground cable
ye-gr 6 mm2
(314-304/51)
Coaxial cable
fixing bracket
(232-124/20)
OSM/N coaxial tail
(L.=1 Mt.)
(b)
(314-327/91)
to idu
section
(a)
(b
(c)
For P/N of Braided coaxial cable see par. 3.5.6 of the UMN Manual. while for P/N of 1/4 coaxial cable
see par. 3.5.7 of the UMN Manual.
This material is included in the base connection elements (2+0 with ADM) 597-525/90.
This material is included in the fixing accessories 332-011/35, included in the base connection element
597-525/90.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
9-31
Siemens
9-32
SRA 4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
10
10.1
PRESETTINGS
In this paragraph instructions are given to check and, if required, to carry out the presettings
relevant to the system type where the equipment is utilized.
There are two presetting types:
Hardware settings, performed through jumpers or connections
Software settings, carried out through PC with dedicated software. With regard to the system software setting options refer to the Guide to the use of the control software", in the
Operator Manual (OMN).
10.1.1
Hardware settings
In the equipment there are no hardware settings.
10.1.2
System E2PROM
The IDU contains two different system EEPROMs to store all the NE configurations:
internal EEPROM in the Controller unit
external EEPROM (KEY), inserted in the front panel of the Alarm Restitution unit.
In the key in the factory have been stored the Serial Number (S/N) and the licence type.
10.2
ACTIVATION
This paragraph includes the procedures for checkings that can be carried out during the installation while activating the equipment.
Fig. 8.7 and Fig. 8.8 show the connectors and the control elements, located on the equipment
front panel.
10.2.1
Local checks
All the units comprising the equipment are tested and adjusted at the factory in order to optimize the characteristics: usually, checks on these unit are not required while installed.
Therefore, the procedures here below described have to be utilized only in case of problems
arising in the system, due to equipment malfunction.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-1
SRA 4
Siemens
The checks are:
make sure the equipment is correctly equipped as per indications in the "EQUIPMENT
COMPOSITION".
check the connection cables (or cable) between the indoor assembly and the outdoor assemblies (or assembly) are connected and IF connection have been made as per indications in the "EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".
check the equipment is connected to the primary supply voltage as described in the
"EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION".
10.2.2
IDU first installation
Insert the KEY into the right connector on the Alarms Restitution unit.
Switch ON the IDU by turning the switch situated on the front cover of the Alarms Restitution unit.
At this point the Controller reads the S/N and the type of license of the KEY and stores it
internally.
The LCT shall now be able to complete the equipment configuration. (Based on the type
of license memorised a basic default configuration will be memorised on the KEY).
When configuring the equipment through the LCT, the configuration will be automatically
memorised both on the Controller unit and on the KEY.
The KEY must always be inserted during regular equipment configuration.
Should it be removed, the "No setting mode" alarm will be activated (and the
red "CRITICAL MAJOR" LED will light up on the Controller unit) thereby not
allowing to modify the equipment configuration through the LCT.
If a KEY other than that used during the first installation is inserted while the
equipment is ON, the Controller compares the S/N and the type of license
memorised (and that corresponds to the first installation KEY) with that of the
KEY inserted. A data misalignment is detected and the "No setting mode" alarm
is activated which will prevent modifying the configuration through the LCT.
Check by the LCT that the output power of the Modulator is +5 dBm.
10-2
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
The following are the alarms associated to the KEY (see Fig. 10.1):
Tab. 10.1
KEY alarms
Alarm
Key missing or key
mismatch
Key Fault
10.2.3
Description
LCT alarm
Physically missing or data memori- "No setting mode" alarm activased on the key differ from those me- ted
morised on the IDU
Non recoverable data failure
"Key fault" alarm activated
Alignment
It is necessary to execute the alignment of the antennas to ensure the correct
operation of the equipment and to make reliable the radio link to the remote
terminal.
For the procedures of adjustment and aiming of the antennas, refer to the
documentation annexed to the antennas themselves.
To make easy the aiming operation, the ODU is equipped with a BNC connector that makes
available the AGC voltage as function of the received field (see Fig. 10.2 and Fig. 10.3)).
10.2.4
Checks on equipment
10.2.4.1
List of checks
Control of the system configuration
Configuration of IP address
PTx and PRx
Switching test for 1+1 systems
Background BER
Final checks
Restore of the operating conditions
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-3
SRA 4
Siemens
10.2.4.2
Control of the system configuration
Control, by means of the supplied SW (LCT), that the system configuration is according to what
required for the connection in object. In particular, it is necessary to set on both terminals the
configuration, the operating frequency and the ATPC enabling, according to what foreseen by
the specifications related to the interested link.
Eventually, configure the equipment according to what specified in Guide to use of the control
software, in the Operator Manual (OMN).
10.2.4.3
Configuration of IP address
On the first installation, the IDU has a default IP address (192.168.255.3) and then the user
can access the NE, set the network IP address and build the map containing the IP address
itself. For this purpose, refer to the guide to use of the management program, of the OMN
manual.
If the network planning was not available, it is necessary to insert, in the two terminals,
addresses belonging to two different IP subnetwork (site A = 100.100.100.6; site B =
150.150.150.6), Netmask 255.255.255.0, to be able to control both the Network Elements
10.2.4.4
Received and Transmitted Power
By means of Measurement --> Unit menu of the supplied SW (LCT), it is possible to check the
levels of received and transmitted power (refer to the guide to use of the management program,
of OMN manual).
10.2.4.5
Switching test
In presence of the protected configurations, proceed to the check of the switching functionality.
With the aid of an SDH frame analyzer, connected to the tributary access points, check that,
after the different switching operations, the service is active.
For a correct execution of the switching operations, refer to the use guide of the
management program, in the OMN manual.
10.2.4.6
Background BER
Check that the connection is active and operating (no alarm, payload transit); for this purpose,
a SDH frame analyzer can be connected to the tributary access points or, alternatively, it is possible to monitor the connection quality by means of the Performance Monitoring functionality
provided by the software for equipment management (refer to the Operator Manual - OMN).
In this way, check that the qualitative parameters of the connection are in compliance to the project specification.
10-4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
10.2.4.7
Siemens
Final checks
After all the local verifications and the alignment operation have been executed, check that the
levels of the received power in both the terminals are in compliance to the project specification.
10.2.4.8
Restoring of the operating conditions
Once the checks on the connection have been executed, restore the operating conditions of the
system (removing the possible manual forcing).
10.3
LIST AND USE OF ACCESSORIES
The accessories required for carrying out check measurements, repairs and parts replacements of equipment the SRA 4 system consists of, are delivered for each station where the
equipment itself is installed.
This paragraph contains useful indications for the correct use and for the identification of the
accessories that are grouped under the P/N 597-524/95.
10.3.1
List and use of accessories
See Tab. 10.2.

Tab. 10.2
Station accessories
Denomination
Scredriver for screws
4,5x80
Scredriver for
3x60 Phillips screws
Dynamometric key
Code
323-502/01
Exagonal head screw 3 x 8

Elastic washer 3
Exagonal head screw 3 x 12
Exagonal nut 3
Cable, connection, 9 contacts female/male
(L = 2.6 m)
204-371/07D
207-501/07D
204-371/09D
206-701/05D
314-101/76
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
323-502/11
323-500/99
Q.ty
Use
1
It is used for the fixing subrack to the
rack
1
It is used for the assembling and
disassembling of the mechanical parts
1
It is used for the SMA connectors tightening
4
8
It is used to tighten to transition to the
4
w/g section and to the RT
4
1
It is used for connecting the PC to IDU
10-5
SRA 4
Siemens
10.4
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS AND ALARMS
10.4.1
Normal operating conditions
Normal operating conditions of the equipment are indicated as follows:
All red LEDs on the front panel of the units: OFF
RF output power and RF input power at nominal values.
The normal operating conditions of the front panel LEDs are shown in Fig. 10.3, Fig. 10.4,
Fig. 10.5 and Fig. 10.6.
10.4.1.1
Alarm conditions
An alarm condition indicates a failure in the outdoor or indoor unit.

An alarm condition in the equipment is indicated by the switching on of a red LED on the front
panel of the failed unit.
The alarms are also processed and managed by the Controller unit. The LCT, connected to the
Controller unit, allows an easy location of the failed unit.
10.5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND RESTORING
This paragraph instructs about troubleshooting to be carried out on the equipment.

The malfunctions are pointed out by LEDs on the equipment, on the indoor assembly front panel (see Fig. 10.7, Fig. 10.8 and Fig. 10.9).
The indications function on the front panel is described in the "LED, MONITORING POINTS,
CONNECTORS AND SWITCHES".
The sequence of the recommended actions to locate a faulty part of the equipment, to replace
it and to restore the service, are schematized in Fig. 10.10.
10.5.1
Troubleshooting
The failed unit is located by using the LCT: refer to the document "Guide to the use of the control software", which is part of the Operator Manual (OMN).
10-6
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
10.5.1.1
Replacement procedures
This paragraph contains the instruction to carry out the system parts fault replacement.
Follow the instructions step by step, otherwise the SW configuration could be lost, and therefore
the LCT is necessary for a new SW configuration setting.
Note: IDU front panel LEDs gives fault status general information; in case of a more deep investigation about cause and severity one alarm is requested, the LCT is necessary.
10.5.1.2
ODU replacement
1.
Power down the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit in the IDU)
(ODU PWR OFF).
2.
Replace the ODU.
3.
Power up the ODU (switch on the right side of the relevant BB+MODEM unit in the IDU)
(ODU PWR ON).
4.
Verify that the link has been recovered (no alarms)
10.5.1.3
IDU-ODU cable replacement
1.
Turn the ODU off by the switch on the front panel of the BB+MODEM unit (ODU PWR
OFF).
2.
Disconnect the fault IDU-ODU connection cable.
3.
Connect a new IDU-ODU cable.
4.
Turn the ODU on (ODU PWR ON).
5.
Verifies that the LEDs on the BB+MODEM unit are in the normal operating conditions.
6.
Otherwise, see Troubleshooting through LCT (OMN manual).
10.5.1.4
IDU unit replacement
BB+MODEM unit
BB/modem unit 1 in STI systems
1.
Change the system type:
Should the current system type be 1+1 FD STI, change to 1+1 FD DTI
Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY STI, change to 1+1 HSBY DTI.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-7
SRA 4
Siemens
2.
Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2 signal
in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 2 and then set immediately the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch to channel 2.
3.
Switch off ODU 1, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of the BB/modem
unit 1, and extract the BB/modem unit 1.
4.
Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) and connect again
all the cables, except the STM-1 cables.
5.
Switch on ODU 1, wait the on-line state of the BB/modem unit 1 and the completion of the
cable compensation procedure.
6.
Set again the switches to the AUTO mode.
7.
Move the cables (or the optical fibers) of the STM-1#1 signal (and of the STM-1#2 signal
in case of 2xSTM-1 capacity) on the front panel of the BB/modem unit 1 and then force
immediately the Tributary switch on channel 1.
8.
Change the system type:
Should the current system type be 1+1 FD DTI, change to 1+1 FD STI
Should the current system type be 1+1 HSBY DTI, change to 1+1 HSBY STI.
The procedure does not protect the service channels.
BB/modem unit 2 in STI systems or BB/modem unit 1 and 2 in DTI systems

1.
Set the switch mode to MANUAL and set the Tributary switch to channel 1 (should unit 2
be replaced) or to channel 2 (should unit 1 be replaced).
2.
Switch off the ODU, disconnect all the cables, connected on the front panel of the BB/modem unit, and extract the BB/modem unit.
3.
Insert the spare BB/modem unit (with the ODU switch in position OFF) and connect again
all the cables.
4.
Switch on the ODU, wait the completion of the on-line and cable compensation procedures.
5.
Set again the switches to the AUTO mode.
Controller unit
1.
Remove the front panel of the unit by unscrewing the 2 screws on the sides.
2.
Remove the faulty unit by using the two levers on the sides.
10-8
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
3.
Siemens
Insert the spare Controller unit. The equipment configuration that has been memorised on
the KEY will be automatically entered on the new Controller unit.
Alarm Restitution Unit

The Alarm Restitution unit replacement must be carried out after a proper procedure driven by
a LCT command. In fact its bare removal causes the System switching off, since the unit holds
the power switch.
A bypass switch within the BB/Modem unit allows the powering of the whole equipment.
This switch is available in the BB/Modem unit with P/N 612-314/07 for the electrical version and
P/N 612-314/06 for the optical version. An FPGA register allows the Controller to recognize if
this feature is supported by the BB/Modem unit.
This feature is available starting from SVR 4.5. It provides an activation command to force the
bypass switch and an automatic switch off command 3 minutes later. This time is long enough
to replace the failed Alarm Restitution unit and avoids dangerous overheating (fans are supplied only by Alarm Restitution unit).
Hardware details are shown in Fig. 10.11. An OptoMOS relay (normally open) placed in the
BB/Modem unit acts as an electronic switch: a command coming from the Controller Unit causes the by-pass of the mechanical switch housed in the Alarm Restitution unit. A current sensor
makes the actual command status available to the FPGA for reporting to the Controller.
Replacement procedure:
1.
Connect the LCT to the equipment.
2.
To replace the Alarm Restitution Unit without the switching off of the radio system, follow
the procedure explained in the SRA 4 OMN Manual para. 6.7.1.6 (Maintenance).
Fans unit
1.
Push up-side the switch on the front panel (in position OPEN).
2.
Remove the unit by using the handle on the front panel.
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-9
SRA 4
Siemens
10.6
LIST OF SPARE PARTS
The maintenance philosophy consists in the replacement of an outdoor assembly (ODU) or a

unit of the IDU. Therefore all spares consist of outdoor assembly and units that have the same
P/N of the failed ones.
10.6.1
IDU spare parts list
Tab. 10.3
List of spare parts - IDU

Denomination
SRA4 IDU
BB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)
or
BB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM)
SRA4 IDU-STM1
P/N
612-314/07
612-314/06
612-314/65
BB-MODEM unit with electrical interface (32/128 TCM)
or
BB-MODEM unit with optical interface (32/128 TCM)
Controller unit
Alarm Restitution unit
Fan unit
Wired subrack
Cover
10.6.1.1
AP ODU
Tab. 10.4
7 GHz
612-314/64
634-001/02
614-104/66
614-041/17
628-587/10
224-065/54
ODU P/N
735-201/07-xxx
Tab. 10.5
8 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/08-xxx
10-10
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 10.6
10 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/10-xxx
Tab. 10.7
11 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/11-xxx
Tab. 10.8
13 GHz
ODU P/N
735-201/13-xxx
10.6.1.2
AP/CC ODU
Tab. 10.9
6 GHz (6L)
ODU P/N
735-211/06-xxx
Tab. 10.10
6 GHz (6U)
ODU P/N
735-211/06-xxx
Tab. 10.11
7 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/07-xxx
Tab. 10.12
8 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/08-xxx
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-11
SRA 4
Siemens
Tab. 10.13
11 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/11-xxx
Note - The ODUs can be used also as spare parts of the previous ODUs according to the
following table:
Tab. 10.14
ODU P/N
735-211/11-110
735-211/11-111
735-211/11-160
735-211/11-161
735-211/11-210
735-211/11-211
735-211/11-260
735-211/11-261
as Spare part also of the ODU

735-211/11-100
735-211/11-101
735-211/11-150
735-211/11-151
735-211/11-200
735-211/11-211
735-211/11-250
735-211/11-251
735-211/11-310
735-211/11-311
735-211/11-360
735-211/11-361
735-211/11-300
735-211/11-301
735-211/11-350
735-211/11-351
13 GHz
ODU P/N
735-211/13-xxx
10-12
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.1 IDU Key position (Alarm Restitution unit)
ALARM
RESTITUTION
Unit
BB/MODEM #1
Unit
CONTROLLER
Unit
BB/MODEM #2
Unit
ALARM
Unita
RESTITUTORE
RESTITUTION
ALLRMI
unit
IDU PWR
Alarms
Key
ON
OF
FAN
Unita
unit
FAN
CONTROLLER
Unita
unit
CONTROLLORE
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T
E
S
T
M
N
/
W
C
/
M
J
KEY
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-13
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.2 ODU connection for the measurement of the received field
ODU (AP)
For Factory use
BNC connector for

Rx field measurement
ODU (AP/CC)
For Factory use
For Factory use

BNC connector for
Rx field measurement
The VAGC range is between -3,4 V and 1,2 V (typical values) for PRX values
between -30 dBm and -75 dBm, according to a linear law with rate of about 0,5
V for 10 dB.
10-14
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.3 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system (SRA 4
IDU)
OFF
See Tab. 8.1
Unita
RESTITUTORE
ALLRMI
CHA
Key
ON
STM-n #1
USER
IDU PWR
Alarms
ODU ALM
CHB
V11
WST
G703
I
OF
Out
Out
CABLE ALM
STM-n #2
I
GREEN ON
See Tab. 8.1
OFF
Out
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
ODU PWR
ON
IF
CABLE
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
Unita
FAN
CHA
Unita
CONTROLLORE
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T
E
S
T
M
N
/
W
C
/
M
J
CHB
ODU ALM
USER
V11
WST
G703
I
Out
STM-n #1
I
Out
STM-n #2
I
Out
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
IF
CABLE
ODU PWR
ON
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
OFF
GREEN
ON
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-15
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.4 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 1+0/1+1 system
(SRA4 IDU-STM1)
See Tab. 8.1
OFF OFF
GREEN ON
See Tab. 8.1
OFF
GREEN
ON
10-16
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.5 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a 2x(1+1)CC system (SRA
4 IDU)
GREEN
ON
See Tab. 8.1
OFF
OFF
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
Key
V-pol
IDU
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
H-pol
IDU
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
LCT
F
A
N
U V11
G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
OFF
ODU
ALM
GREEN ON
See Tab. 8.1
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
E-link
Co-Channel
coax cables
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
10-17
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.6 LEDs status in the normal operating conditions of a N+1 configuration (SRA 4
IDU)
GREEN
ON
OFF
See Tab. 8.1
OFF
CHACHB
Alarms
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
U
n.
IDU
Key
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
Key
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
E-link
10-18
U
n.
IDU
O
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
WST
G703
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
OFF
GREEN ON
See Tab. 8.1
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
PS
CH. 2
IF
PS
CH. 3
B-link
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.7 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA 4 IDU)

Unita
RESTITUTORE
ALLRMI
CHA
IDU PWR
Alarms
Key
ON
ODU ALM
CHB
STM-n #1
USER
V11
WST
G703
I
OF
Out
Out
CABLE ALM
STM-n #2
I
Out
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
ODU PWR
ON
IF
CABLE
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
Unita
FAN
CHA
Unita
CONTROLLORE
Q-lan
E-Link
LCT
T
E
S
T
T
E
S
T
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
M
N
/
W
C
/
M
J
CHB
ODU ALM
USER
V11
WST
G703
I
Out
STM-n #1
I
Out
STM-n #2
I
Out
CABLE ALM
CO-CHANNEL
I
Out
IF
CABLE
ODU PWR
ON
OFF
Exp. Port
PS
M
C
N
/
/
M
W
J
10-19
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.8 LEDs in 1+1/2+0 configuration (SRA4 IDU-STM1)
T M C
E N /
S / M
10-20
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.9 LEDs in N+1 configuration (SRA 4 IDU)

M
N
/
W
T
E
S
T
C
/
M
J
CHACHB
Alarms
U
n.
IDU
Key
IDU
MAIN
Q-lan E-Link
F
A
N
LCT
U V11
G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11 G703
S
E
R
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
Alarms
Key
IDU
EXT
Q-lan E-Link
LCT
E-link
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
U
n.
IDU
O
F
A
N
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
CHACHB
U V11
S
E
R
G703
WST
In Out
STM-1 #1
Out In
STM-1 #2
Out In
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

ALM
I
O
In Out
Exp. Port
ODU
ALM
CABLE CO-CH ODU PWR

O
ALM In Out I
Exp. Port
D
IF
STBY
PS
IF
CH. 1
PS
IF
CH. 2
PS
IF
PS
CH. 3
B-link
10-21
Siemens
SRA 4
Fig. 10.10 Flow chart No. 1 - Intervention procedure because of failure
10-22
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG
12 V
DC/DC
Power switch
Restitution
Unit
Alarm
BB/MODEM Unit
DC/DC
Converter
New BB board
indicator
Command
Check and status
Tertiary
voltages
Controller
Unit
SRA 4
Siemens
Fig. 10.11 Alarm Restitution unit replacement management
10-23
Siemens
10-24
SRA 4
IMC 0033METD6-13
2006 Siemens AG

Imc0033metd - Sra4 4.8!6!13 GHZ - Training Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Imc0033metd - Sra4 4.8!6!13 GHZ - Training Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

s

6-13 GHz (WB ODU)

Copyright (C) Siemens S.p.A. 2006

Issued by Customer Documentation Department

SDH Split Radio (WB ODU)

Concepts and Characteristics in SDH

SRA 4 6-13 GHz - Rel. 4.8

Activation & Maintenance

Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 2, August 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Concepts and Characteristics in SDH Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Issue 3, September 2006

Activation & Maintenance

Issue 3, September 2006

Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.1

4.1.7.3 ODU power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10

6.1.5.2 1+1 Supporting frames for Hot Stand-by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4

10.2.2 IDU first installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2

SDH multiplex structure (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12

1+0/1+1/2+0 Indoor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ODU connection for the measurement of the received field. . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF 6 GHz channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2

Tab. 5.23 11 GHz channelling according to ITU-R F.387 Recommends 1

The equipment complies with the 1999/5/EC European specification.

On the equipment, there are the following plates:

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Warnings for the optical safety

Warnings for the electrical safety

The equipment complies with the EN 60950-1 safety specifications.

The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged.

Waste equipment management

INFORMATION TO USER (FOR ITALIAN MARKET ONLY)

Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology

SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components

Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs

MOS/FET components and arrays

Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHz

Modules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels:

Concepts and Characteristics in SDH

Objectives of the synchronous digital hierarchy

definition of useable knots as a transmission vehicle to a "multivendor" environment and

harmonization of two plesiochronous hierarchies, European and American, creating a

standardization of service information contained in the overhead (OH)

easy access to tributary signals and simplified multiplex/demultiplex operations;

simplification of insertion/extraction functions for tributaries into/from an aggregate stream

compatibility between equipment of different origins, obtained through:

automatic centralized management of the transmission network;

equipment integration through combining line terminal and multiplex;

Digital structure of SDH signals

STM-1 frame structure

a) number of bits composing each byte

Essentially, each frame is composed of:

Administrative unit AU-4

The administrative unit AU-4 is composed of two parts (Fig. 3.4):

Its overall transport capacity is:

a) bits composing each single byte